JP5154263B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  In a game machine called a pachinko machine, an internal lottery process is performed when a game ball wins at the start opening, and if the result of this internal lottery process is successful, a large amount of game balls can be given to the player. A jackpot game is played. This type of gaming machine is generally provided with an effect image display device on which an effect image corresponding to the result of the lottery process is displayed.

  However, although the effect image that can give the player a sense of expectation that the result of the lottery process may be a win is displayed on the effect image display device, the frequency of the effect with a high expectation is low. Because it must be done (expectation decreases when it is done frequently), the interest has been reduced. Therefore, in order to solve such problems, a technique for performing group effects with a plurality of gaming machines has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine system in which a host gaming machine that supervises collective performance and a plurality of guest gaming machines are network-connected, and a handshake between the host gaming machine and the guest gaming machine is performed. A technology is disclosed in which a group game is performed in accordance with a command from a host gaming machine by performing a simple communication. In this way, by constructing a new gaming system and performing an expectation effect (group effect) separately from the expectation effect of a single gaming machine, it is possible to perform an effect with a high expectation at an appropriate frequency. (See paragraphs 0002, 0040, 0069, 0070, and 0162 to 0164 in Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-261593 A

  However, according to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the host gaming machine commands a plurality of guest gaming machines connected to the network to perform a group presentation, which is different from the expectation degree presentation of a single gaming machine. Expectation direction is performed, but this expectation direction is forcibly performing group production on all gaming machines, so the game style so far will be destroyed, and the player's willingness to play may be lost Absent. In addition, if group production is forcibly performed on all gaming machines, a willingness to participate in a game by a new player may be lost. Furthermore, since a large-scale game system must be constructed, the burden on the hall is not small. For these reasons, there is a possibility that the effect that an effect with a high degree of expectation can be performed at an appropriate frequency is halved.

  An object of the present invention is to suppress a load on a hall while suppressing a decrease in a player's interest and preventing a decrease in game motivation.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine that configures a gaming machine train in a state where a plurality of gaming machines are arranged, and that executes individual independent gaming operations in the gaming machine train. , A launching means capable of launching a game ball toward the game area, a receiving port capable of receiving the game ball launched toward the game area by the launching means, and an effect image display capable of displaying a predetermined effect image Means, main control means for controlling the progress of the gaming operation, and other control means connected to the main control means for controlling the effect image displayed on the effect image display means. The control means includes an acceptance detection means for detecting acceptance of a game ball at the entrance, a lottery means for performing an internal lottery process based on detection of acceptance of the game ball by the acceptance detection means, Internal lottery When the result is a win, the bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player, the result of the internal lottery process, and the predetermined effect image displayed on the effect image display means Information transmitting means for transmitting information to the other control means connected by wiring via the wiring, and the other control means is transmitted from the main control means via the wiring. Based on the information receiving means for receiving the information and the information received by the information receiving means, a predetermined effect image as a result of the internal lottery process is displayed on the effect image display means, and the lottery If the result of the process is a win, the image display control means for displaying a special image as the predetermined effect image, and the other control means further includes the internal lottery process A first information outflow unit that causes the first information to flow out to a predetermined area outside the apparatus, on the condition that information indicating that the result is a win is received by the information receiving unit, and an area wider than the predetermined area A second information outflow unit for outflowing the second information, an information collection unit for collecting information from outside the machine, and when the first information is collected by the information collection unit, the predetermined effect image When the second information is picked up by the information collecting means, the special information when the information collecting means displays the special information image that is not related to the internal lottery processing result. And a notice effect execution means for performing a notice effect that indicates to the outside that the image is displayed.

  In the above gaming machines, although a plurality of gaming machines are arranged in a state of being arranged with other gaming machines, gaming operations are individually executed independently of the other gaming machines. In executing this gaming operation, the gaming machine has a main control unit that controls the progress of the gaming operation, and another control unit that controls the production in response to an instruction from the main control unit. Yes. The main control means and other control means are physically (electrically) connected by wiring, and various instructions are given from the main control means to the other control means via this wiring.

  The main control means includes an acceptance detection means for detecting acceptance of a game ball at the entrance, a lottery means for performing an internal lottery process, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, Information transmitting means for transmitting various information to the control means. In such a gaming machine, for example, when the launching means fires a game ball toward the game area in response to the player's operation, if the acceptance detecting means detects the winning of the game ball to the entrance, a lottery The means performs an internal lottery process, and when a winning is made in this lottery process, the privilege game executing means gives a privilege game advantageous to the player. Then, the information transmission means transmits the result of the lottery process and information related to the predetermined effect image to the other control means via the wiring. In this case, generally, information that can grasp both the result of the lottery process and the predetermined effect image displayed on the effect image display means is transmitted to the other control means. Information related to the result and information related to the predetermined effect image may be transmitted separately.

  The “information related to the predetermined effect image” is information indicating the display mode of the effect image displayed on the effect image display means. For example, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern or / and the expected effect (for example, reach effect) Command information indicating the above. Further, the “predetermined effect image” is an effect image that can suggest the result of an internal lottery process. Further, when the result of the internal lottery process is at least a win, a specific image that is an aspect of a predetermined effect image is displayed. This specific image is an image that can suggest that the result of the internal lottery process is a win, and is exemplified by “reach effect” and / or “zolo display”. In addition, the “privileged game” may be any game that gives a player an advantageous game value when the lottery result is won in each game machine. A big hit game that can be given is exemplified.

  The other control means includes information receiving means for receiving various information transmitted from the main control means, and effect image display control means for displaying a predetermined effect image on the effect image display means. Here, the information transmitted from the main control means and received by the information receiving means is information related to the result of the internal lottery process (winning information) and information related to the effect image (symbol variation pattern and symbol variation time). It is. When the information receiving means receives various types of information from the main control means, the effect image display control means displays a predetermined effect image in accordance with the received information, thereby deriving the result of the internal lottery process. Here, when the result of the lottery process is a win, a specific image (for example, an image of a decorative design stopped and displayed with a doublet or an image suggesting that a bonus game is executed) as a predetermined effect image By displaying, it is derived that the lottery result is a win.

  Further, the other control means collects the information from the outside, the first information outflow means for letting out the first information to the outside, the second information outflow means for letting out the second information to the outside of the airplane, and the outside information. And an information collecting means. Here, when the information indicating that the result of the internal lottery process is a win is received from the main control means, the first information outflow means causes the first information to flow out (release) to a predetermined area outside the machine, The second information outflow unit causes the second information to flow out (release). In this way, even if the announcement effect and the display of the special effect image are performed simultaneously on a plurality of gaming machines by causing the information to flow out twice when the notice effect is performed and when the special effect image is displayed, It is possible to perform fine control such that a deviation that can occur between gaming machines can be reduced. Further, the second information is leaked in a wider range than the predetermined area where the first information is leaked. As a specific example, the first information is leaked only to gaming machines arranged on the right side of the own machine, and the second information is leaked to gaming machines arranged on the left and right sides of the own machine. Embodiments are illustrated.

  The information collecting means can collect information from outside the apparatus. The information from outside the machine includes, for example, the first information and the second information leaked from other gaming machines constituting a plurality of gaming machine trains. Information and second information can be detected. Thus, unlike the relationship between the main control means and the other control means described above, between one gaming machine and another gaming machine, as in the case where the wiring is physically (electrically) connected. In addition, information can be exchanged without any complicated control. In addition, since there is no wired connection or network connection between multiple gaming machines, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player and prevent a decrease in the willingness of the game. Since there is no need for capital investment, it is possible to suppress the load on the hall.

  By the way, the first information flowing out from the first information outflow means and the second information outflowing from the second information outflow means are not transmitted to a specific gaming machine, and everyone collects them. (That is, the destinations of the first information and the second information are not determined as in the case of transmission / reception between wired-connected gaming machines). Further, even in the information collecting means, the information sent to itself is not received, but the information leaked from the first information outflow means or / and the second information outflow means is not specified. Will receive. As described above, since the first information and the second information are information that can be received by anyone, the first information or / and the second information outflow means implicitly receive the first information or / and The second information is leaked, and the information collecting means implicitly collects the information.

  Note that the first information and the second information are signals transmitted via a medium such as air, and the strength ( The one whose amplitude is attenuated is preferable. Such signals correspond to waves (waveform signals) exemplified by sound waves and light waves. In particular, in order for information from the outside of the machine to be silently collected by the information collection means so that the player does not notice it, such signals include audio, ultra-low A frequency, an ultrasonic wave, etc. are preferable. As described above, by using a predetermined waveform signal, not only can the trouble of electrical connection be eliminated, but there is no need to perform complicated control as in the case of physical wiring connection. Furthermore, there is no worry that the hanging board is connected as an illegal act. As the predetermined waveform signal, an electromagnetic wave may be adopted as long as it does not affect the human body.

  Further, the other control means has a collected information cause display control means for displaying the special effect image as an effect different from the above-described effect image when the first information is collected by the information collecting means. . In other words, when the first information is leaked from the winning gaming machine to the outside when one of the gaming machines constituting the gaming machine row is won by an internal lottery process, the first information is A special effect image can be displayed on the collected gaming machines. The special effect image is displayed so as not to hinder the visual recognition of the display of the predetermined effect image displayed on the effect image display means. As a result, even if the information is collected and the special effect image is displayed when the display of the predetermined effect image is displayed (that is, when the effect with high expectation is performed), the predetermined effect image is displayed. The visual recognition of the display is not hindered, and a game with a single gaming machine can be enjoyed as before. Furthermore, the display of the predetermined effect image and the display of the special effect image, such as the interestingness of guessing whether or not the own device is a hit stand, from the mode of the predetermined effect image when the special effect image is displayed. A synergistic effect can be expected.

  Further, in the gaming machine, even if the first information and / or the second information is collected, the first information or / and the first information regarding whether to display the notice effect or / and the special effect image is displayed. It is left to the autonomy of gaming machines that have collected the information of 2. In other words, even if the first information or / and the second information is leaked from the winning gaming machine of the internal lottery process, it will be sent to the other gaming machines as a notice effect or / and a special effect image. It does not force display. By sharing the first information and / or the second information that has flowed out of the winning gaming machine of the internal lottery process with a plurality of gaming machines, only a shared effect such as display of a special effect image is performed. In other words, even if the other control means of each gaming machine collects the first information and / or the second information by the information collecting means, whether or not to display the notice effect or / and the special effect image is determined. You may have the means to determine. Thus, for example, when the first information or / and the second information are collected, if the effect image based on the result of the internal lottery process in the own machine is winning, Without displaying the special effect image, it is possible to continue displaying the effect image based on the winning.

  The “special effect image” is a series of effect images displayed by a plurality of gaming machines constituting the gaming machine train. In each gaming machine, not all of the series of effect images are displayed, but only a part of the effect images. Is displayed. For example, an effect image as a video in which a character or the like moves along a gaming machine row over a plurality of gaming machines can be given. In other words, this “special effect image” does not display the lottery result of each gaming machine only in the gaming machine as in the above-described predetermined effect image, but spans a plurality of gaming machines constituting the gaming machine row. Is displayed. On the other hand, since the above-mentioned predetermined effect image is an effect image that can suggest the result of the internal lottery process in the player's own machine, the series of effect images are not related to other game machines. It is only displayed on the effect image display means (that is, the result of the internal lottery process can only be suggested by the own device).

  In addition, according to the gaming machine, a special effect image is displayed across a plurality of gaming machines separately from the predetermined effect image performed on each gaming machine, so that an effect that can give a player a sense of expectation is provided. The number of times displayed is increased, and the player can be expected to win. In addition, since the special effect image is displayed when the first information is collected, the player is given a “measuring” like a predetermined effect mode performed in each gaming machine or a conventional group effect. It's different from a production that just gives a sense of expectation. More specifically, no matter how splendid production is made that gives the player a sense of expectation on the production image display means of each individual gaming machine, it is not a warning of the winner, it is simply the player's It is just a production that raises expectations. Moreover, if the frequency of flashy productions that give the player a sense of expectation is increased, the so-called gaze production will be increased in spite of the fact that it is not a hit, but on the contrary. Will fall.

  On the other hand, since the special effect image is performed when the first information is collected, when the special effect image is displayed, any one of the plurality of gaming machines constituting the gaming machine row is displayed. This is a notice that 100% of the game machines will always win. Thereby, a great expectation can be given to a plurality of players who are playing a game on the gaming machine island on which the special effect image is displayed. Moreover, even if the special effect image is displayed many times, all of them are performed by collecting the first information. Therefore, one of the plurality of gaming machines is always selected. Rather, the opportunity to give the player a sense of expectation will increase.

  Further, the other control means includes a notice effect executing means for performing a notice effect that externally announces that the special effect image is displayed when the second information is collected by the information collecting means. Here, as described above, since the second information is leaked prior to the leak of the first information, the second information can be collected earlier than the first information in other gaming machines. It becomes. Thus, the notice effect is performed prior to the display of the special effect image without complicated control as in the case where each gaming machine is connected by wire.

  The first information and the second information may be information of different waveforms (for example, different frequencies) or may be information of the same waveform, but without complicated control. From the viewpoint of performing, it is preferable that the first information and the second information are information having the same waveform. However, if the first information and the second information have the same waveform, when the information collecting means collects the information, the special effect image should be displayed or the notice effect should be performed. I have to judge.

  The determination as to whether the special effect image should be displayed or the notice effect should be performed can be made based on whether the collected information is the first information or the second information. Hereinafter, a gaming machine (a hit stand) that leaks the first information and the second information causes the second information outflow means to leak out the second information prior to the outflow of the first information by the first information outflow means. The case is divided into the case where the first information is leaked by the first information outflow unit prior to the outflow of the second information by the second information outflow unit.

  In the case where the second information is leaked by the second information outflow means prior to the outflow of the first information by the first information outflow means, in the other gaming machine (losing stand) that collects these information, When the first information is collected, it is determined that the information is second information (handling), and a notice effect is performed. By performing this notice effect at the timing when the first information is collected, it becomes possible to perform the notice effect at almost the same timing with a plurality of gaming machines without performing complicated control. If the second information is collected within a certain time after the first information is collected, the second information is judged as the first information (handling), and the special effect image is displayed. . If the second information is not collected within a certain time after collecting the first information, it is determined that the stand does not display the special effect image.

  In the case where the first information is leaked by the first information outflow means prior to the outflow of the second information by the second information outflow means, in the other gaming machine (losing stand) that collects these information, If the second information is collected within a certain time after collecting the first information, the first information is judged as the first information (handling), and the second information is used as the second information. Judge (handle). At this time, even if the first information is collected, the special effect image is not displayed immediately, and the notice effect is performed when the second information is collected. Then, after performing the notice effect, the special effect image is displayed. If the second information is not collected within a certain time after the first information is collected, the first information is determined (handled) as the second information. That is, it is determined that the own stand does not display the special effect image, and only the notice effect is performed. However, if the winning platform causes the first information to flow out prior to the second information being leaked, the special effect image will not be displayed immediately even if the first information is collected. When displaying an image, the timing at which the special effect image is displayed may shift between gaming machines. In addition, the notice effect is performed when the second information is collected, and the special effect image is displayed after that, so the time during which the special effect image can be displayed is shortened. This is because, if the display of the special effect image is not completed before the display of the predetermined effect image for winning is completed, the significance of displaying the special effect image is lost. On the other hand, when the hit stand causes the second information to flow out prior to the outflow of the first information, the notice effect can be performed at the timing when the first information is collected, so the time for displaying the special effect image Will not be squeezed. From this point of view, the gaming machine that has won the internal lottery process allows the second information outflow means to flow out the second information prior to the outflow of the first information through the first information outflow means. Is preferred.

  It should be noted that, even if any of the first information and the second information is leaked first, the second information is collected after a certain time has elapsed since the first information was collected. If the information is not collected, the first information is reset when the predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, when the second information is collected after the first information is collected until a certain time elapses, when the second information is collected, the first information and 2 The second information is reset. When new information is collected after the reset, the new information is determined as the first information. Further, the method for determining whether to display a special effect image or to perform a notice effect is not limited to this.

  By the way, the “notice effect” means an effect aspect that expresses to the outside that a special effect image may be displayed. For example, a decoration lamp generally provided in a gaming machine, a game A mode in which a conspicuous light emitter such as a top lamp provided in the vicinity of the machine is turned on or blinked is preferable. As a result, the special effect image will be displayed not only to the player who is playing the game on the gaming machine island, but also to the person who is just passing by or who is playing the game on another gaming machine island. And the effect of attracting customers of the gaming machines arranged on the gaming machine island can be enhanced. Also, according to the gaming machine, since both the predetermined effect image and the special effect image are displayed on the same effect image display device, even if the special effect image is displayed, it is a special effect image. There is a possibility that it cannot be recognized. Therefore, prior notice display is performed prior to display of the special effect image, so that the special effect image can be displayed in advance.

  Furthermore, by configuring the notice effect to be executed prior to the special effect image, it is determined which of the plurality of gaming machines constituting the gaming machine island the special effect image is displayed on. It is possible to make the player grasp in advance. And if a player gives a notice effect on the gaming machine where he / she is playing, he / she can have a sense of expectation that the result of the internal lottery process will be a win, which suppresses a decrease in interest it can.

  As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to suppress the load on the hall while suppressing the decrease in the interest of the player and preventing the decrease in the game motivation.

  Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

[Overall structure of pachinko machine]
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, and the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1, FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 5 is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. .

  1 and 2, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can be mounted with an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown), and pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. The main body frame 3, a glass unit 190 as a transparent plate unit that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and is formed on the game board 4 and into which a ball is to be driven, and the glass The door frame 5 includes a tray unit 300 that is disposed below the unit 190 and receives a prize ball generated as a result of a game and supplies the prize ball to the launch position of the launch rail 38.

  A lower decorative plate 6 whose surface is covered with a decorative cover plate 6a is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side. Although not shown in detail, the outer frame 2 includes upper and lower wooden upper frames. The plate and the lower frame plate and the left and right light alloy (aluminum) side frame plates are assembled in a rectangular shape by connecting them with connecting members for connecting the respective end portions. An upper support bracket 47 and a lower shaft support fixed to the upper and lower sides of the main body frame 3 are attached to an upper support bracket 7 provided on the upper portion of the outer frame 2 and a lower support bracket 8 provided on one upper surface of the lower decorative plate 6. By engaging the metal fitting 48, the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed.

  Further, as described above, the game board 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 4, a prize ball tank 50 for delivering a prize ball to the back surface thereof, a tank rail member 51, a ball passage unit 52, and a ball dispensing device (ball dispensing unit) 53 are attached, and a launching device 57 and electrical components provided on the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except for the game board 4 are controlled at the bottom of the back surface thereof. A substrate unit 54 on which various control boards and power supply boards 395 (see FIG. 41) and the like are collectively provided is attached, and a cover body 58 that covers the rear opening 70 (see FIG. 8) of the main body frame 3 is attached. Is detachably provided.

  Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a handle unit 318 in the above-described dish unit 300. In addition, there is one dish unit 300 provided on the door frame 5, and the handle unit 318 that is conventionally provided on the main body frame 3 is provided on the dish unit 300 on the door frame 5 side, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, and thus the main body frame 3 cannot be visually recognized from the front.

[About the body frame]
First, the game board 4 can be detachably mounted from the front side, and includes a launching device 57, a prize ball tank 50, a tank rail member 51, a ball path unit 52, and a ball payout device 53 for paying out a prize ball. A locking device 60 that locks the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and a door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, and various types for controlling electrical components provided on the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except for the game board 4. The main body frame 3 on which various components such as the board unit 54 on which the control board, the power supply board, etc. are collectively provided and the cover body 58 covering the rear opening 70 are mounted will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. I will explain. 4 and 5 are as described above, and FIG. 6 is a front view of the main body frame 3.

  The configuration of the main body frame 3 to which the game board 4 is attached will be described. The main body frame 3 is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and the main body frame 3 is placed on the upper and lower sides of the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2. An upper shaft support bracket 47 and a lower shaft support bracket 48 are attached to support the opening and closing shaft. The main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 by being engaged with the upper support bracket 7 and the lower support bracket 8 that are attached to the outer frame 2. .

  By the way, when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape as shown in FIG. 6, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof is a game board installation recess 30 for installing the game board 4. A slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 30 is a plate portion 32. In order to form a space for the game board installation recess 30, side walls 290 to 293, which will be described later, protrude rearward in the space behind the game board installation recess 30. The rear protruding portions of various components such as the game board 4 and an effect display device provided on the game board 4 are accommodated.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the front upper side, front right side, and front left side surrounding the game board installation recess 30 have an upper side, a middle part, and a lower side of the front right side that are the open side. A hook opening 36 for opening a door frame hook portion 61 provided in a locking device 60 (described later) attached to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3 and projecting forward is provided, and is on the side of the shaft support. A board positioning protrusion 37 for engaging with a positioning recess 466 formed in the game board 4 is provided on the inner side surface of the front left side part.

  Next, a description will be given of the configuration on the front side of the main body frame 3 and provided on the plate portion 32 positioned below the game board installation recess 30. As shown in FIG. The firing rail 38 is fixed by screws toward the end on the open side. A rail connection member 44 projects from the front surface of the plate portion 32 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 38, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 30, the outer rail 472 of the game board 4. It adjoins the connection channel | path part 477 which is the downstream end. An elliptical game board fixture 46 for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 is rotatably attached to a side position of the rail connection member 44 (position opposite to the firing rail 38). The game board fixing tool 46 is rotated clockwise in a state where the game board 4 is placed in the game board installation recess 30 to press the game board fixing tool 46 against the front surface of the game board 4 to play the game board 4. Is fixed. On the other hand, when the game board 4 is removed, the lower part of the game board 4 can be easily released by turning the game board fixture 46 counterclockwise. Further, a prize ball payout stopper mechanism 39 is provided on the side of the game board fixture 46 on the side of the shaft support. The prize ball payout stopper mechanism 39 is provided in the middle of the prize ball path for paying out the prize balls paid out from the ball payout device 53 to the dish unit 300 on the door frame 5 side. When the door frame 5 is opened. The prize ball passage is automatically closed to prevent the balls from spilling out from the prize ball passage, while when the door frame 5 is closed, the prize ball passage is automatically communicated and paid out from the ball dispensing device 53. The awarded ball is paid out to the dish unit 300. A fastening hole 41 for fastening with a fastening portion (not shown) and a fastening portion 469 formed on the game board 4 is formed in the plate portion 32 above the firing position of the firing rail 38.

  Moreover, the lower part of the open side of the plate part 32 is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 40 projecting in a bulging shape toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). A launching device 57 is fixed to the mounting portion 40 from the back surface of the main body frame 3. In addition, a handle connection window 40a into which a slide engagement / disengagement piece 231 (see FIG. 1) of the slide unit 230 attached to the rear surface side of the door frame 5 is inserted is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 40, and the door is formed. When the frame 5 is closed, a slide engagement / disengagement piece 231 to be described later is inserted into the handle connection window 40a, and the handle unit 318 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device 57 are linked together to rotate the handle unit 318. It is possible to adjust the resilience of the launching device 57 with a strength corresponding to the amount of dynamic operation, so that the ball at the launching position of the launching rail 38 is ejected and a desired position in the game area 20 is obtained. Can be launched.

  The front structure of the main body frame 3 is generally as described above. Next, the back surface structure of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, a prize ball tank 50 for storing a ball for paying out as a prize ball or a rental ball is detachably mounted on the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. A tank rail member 51 that guides a ball from the prize ball tank 50 in a laterally inclined manner is disposed, and further, a ball passage unit 52 and a ball dispensing device 53 are provided downward from the lower end of the tank rail member 51. The tank rail member 51 guides the balls from the prize ball tank 50 to the downstream side while aligning them in two rows in the front-rear direction, and the sphere moves from the downstream end of the tank rail member 51 to the ball path unit 52. At this time, the ball passage unit 52 falls in a row. The balls guided from the ball path unit 52 to the ball payout device 53 are in accordance with a payout control program executed by a payout control board 720 (see FIG. 41) housed in a payout control board box 55 described below. A predetermined number of award balls and rental balls are paid out, and the discharged balls are discharged to a dish unit 300 provided on the front side of the door frame 5. Although not shown in detail, the ball payout device 53 is provided with a payout motor and a rotary payout member that is rotationally driven by the payout motor and pays out the balls one by one.

  Furthermore, a substrate unit 54 is attached to the lower surface of the back surface of the main body frame 3. The board unit 54 includes a game board 4 such as a payout control board box 55, an external terminal board 56, and a power supply board box (not shown, but fixed to the back side of the payout control board box 55 and the external terminal board 56). Substrate boxes that are not provided in the above are collectively provided. That is, the board boxes for storing the control boards that do not need to be exchanged even when the game board 4 is exchanged are collectively provided. Then, when the game board 4 is stored and installed in the game board installation recess 30, the main control board provided on the game board 4 side and the board provided on the board unit 54, which need to be connected to the main control board, The electrical connection is automatically performed. A unitized launching device 57 is attached to the launching device mounting portion 40 below the substrate unit 54 described above. Further, a cover body 58 is provided in the rear opening 70 formed along the rear end of the side wall 290 to 293 described above of the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed. The cover body 58 covers the entire area of the rear part of the game board 4, and when the cover body 58 is attached and closed, as shown in FIG. The tank rail member 51 is formed to have substantially the same vertical plane as the rear end portion.

  A locking device 60 is fixed to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3. The locking device 60 is a so-called W-lock that locks both the outer frame 2 of the main body frame 3 and the main frame 3 of the door frame 5. A plurality (three in this embodiment) of door frame hooks 61 and cylinder locks 62 (both see FIG. 1) are provided so as to protrude forward.

  Next, the structure of the game board installation recessed part 30 is demonstrated. FIG. 7 is a side view of the main body frame 3 before the parts are attached, and FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached as viewed from the front. As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the gaming board installation recess 30 has a front side face portion that does not house the game board 4 in a part on the upper side and the open side, and a side face portion on the upper side. Although nothing is formed in the open side, hook openings 36 through which the door frame hook portion 61 of the locking device 60 penetrates are formed in three places, upper, middle and lower, on the open side surface portion. That is, the locking device 60 is fixed to the back surface of the open side flange portion (see FIG. 4).

  Thus, the game board installation recess 30 includes a first side wall 290 that is provided in a rearward direction from the inner side surface on the pivot support side and the upper side portion and the open side surface portion described above, and a rear side from the first side wall 290. A second side wall 291 provided around, a third side wall 292 provided rearward from the second side wall 291, a fourth side wall 293 provided rearward from the third side wall 292, Thus, the left and right sides of the main body frame 3 and the rear part of the upper side are formed in a concave shape. The first side wall 290 to the fourth side wall 293 are formed such that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) are straightly extended rearward with a step when viewed from the back, whereas the left side ( The open side is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 5) that is inclined inwardly from the first side wall 290 toward the fourth side wall 293. This is because the rear end of the fourth side wall 293 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 290 to the fourth side wall 293 on the left side (open side) are straightly formed rearward. May be in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate of the outer frame 2 and may not be opened smoothly. Therefore, the first side wall 290 to the fourth side wall 293 on the open side can be smoothly opened by inclining inside. It is something that can be done. At the same time, the locking device 60 is attached along the first side wall 290 on the open side, but the attachment is performed using a lock attachment hole (not shown) provided in the rear end side of the first side wall 290. In order to form the lock mounting hole (not shown), the fourth side wall 293 is formed in an inclined step shape from the first side wall 290 on the open side. Furthermore, the step size of the first side wall 290 to the fourth side wall 293 also needs to be in contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 because the step between the first side wall 290 and the second side wall 291 is required. It is formed with a large level difference, but the other level differences are extremely small.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the side walls 290 to 293 are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively, and in this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 90 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 290 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is formed in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 291, third side wall 292, and fourth side wall 293. The rear projecting portions of various gaming devices provided at 4 are accommodated. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, as will be described below, the second side wall 291, the third side wall 292, and the fourth side wall 293 are formed to a position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space is secured, for example, even when an effect display device 115 or the like that occupies almost the entire area of the game board 4 is attached, the rearward projecting portions of such various parts are easily stored. It is something that can be done.

  Further, a left rear wall 294, an upper rear wall 295, and a right rear wall 296 project inward from the rear edge of the fourth side wall 293 on the left, upper, and right sides as viewed from the back. . The right rear wall 296 has a flat front surface, and the ball passage unit 52 and the ball dispensing device 53 are detachably attached to the rear surface of the right rear wall 296. Accordingly, it is sufficient for the protruding width to the inside of the right rear wall 296 to have a width for attaching the ball passage unit 52 and the ball dispensing device 53. Further, the upper rear wall 295 has a flat front surface, and the tank rail member 51 is attached to the rear surface of the upper rear wall 295, so that the lower end side is formed in an inclined shape. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the upper rear wall 295 to have a height width dimension of the tank rail member 51 attached in an inclined manner. Furthermore, the front surface of the right rear wall 296 has a flat plate shape, and a cover body supporting cylinder portion 280 that pivotally supports the cover body 58 is formed on the rear surface. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the right rear wall 296 to have a width dimension that forms the cover body supporting cylinder portion 280.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the left rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and the right rear wall 296 that protrude inward from the rear edge of the fourth side wall 293 are formed in a flat plate shape. Corresponds to the peripheral part of the game board 4, and as described above, the second side wall 291, the third side wall 292, and the fourth side wall 293 reach the position corresponding to the peripheral part of the game board 4. Since the size of the space to be formed is secured, for example, even in the case where an effect display device 115 or the like that occupies almost the entire area of the game board 4 is attached, the rear projecting portion by such various parts is not provided. It can be stored easily. The inside of the left rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and the right rear wall 296 is a rear opening 70, and the rear opening 70 is closed by a cover body 58 (see FIG. 4) so as to be freely opened and closed. It has become.

[About the door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the door frame 5, FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame 5, and FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the door frame 5.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the door frame 5 has a vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 formed on the upper part of a door frame body 100 formed in a square shape, and a door lens unit around the front surface of the gaming window 101. 120 is attached, and a plate unit 300 is provided in the door frame main body 100 on the front surface of the plate-like portion below the game window 101, and a handle unit 318 is protruded and fixed to one side (open side) of the plate unit 300. Has been. In addition, a reinforcing sheet metal 160 is fixed around the gaming window 101 on the back surface of the door frame main body 100, and a glass unit 190 is attached so as to close the gaming window 101, and a plate-like portion below the gaming window 101. The slide unit 230, the mounting base 220, and the frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 corresponding to the handle unit 318 are attached to the back surface of the frame. A security cover 210 having a security function is also attached to the bottom of the back surface of the glass unit 190.

  The door frame main body 100 is formed in a frame shape from a synthetic resin, and as described above, the vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 is formed in the upper part, and the lower part of the gaming window 101 is a plate-like part. Circular speaker openings 102 that penetrate the speakers 144 a and 144 b are formed on the upper left and right sides of the game window 101, and a stop lever for locking the stopper piece 194 of the glass unit 190 below the speaker opening 102. 108 is rotatably provided.

  On the other hand, a prize ball passing port 103 through which a prize ball communication rod 431 (see FIGS. 16 and 17) of the dish unit 300 penetrates is formed in the plate-like portion below the game window 101, and is obliquely A lid opening 105 for detaching the side opening lid 383 (see FIGS. 16 and 17) is opened near the center, and a ball feeding unit 226 is mounted at a position adjacent to the opening side of the lid opening 105. A ball feed opening 104 is opened, and a lock hole 106 through which the cylinder lock 62 passes is further opened closer to the opening side of the ball feed opening 104. A slide unit mounting recess 107 for attaching the slide unit 230 is formed on the back side of the plate-like portion below the ball feed opening 104. Similarly, engagement receiving pieces (not shown) for hooking the latching protrusions 195 of the glass unit 190 are formed on the lower left and right sides of the game window 101 on the back side of the lower plate-like portion. A mounting opening 110 to which the mounting elastic piece 213 of the security cover 210 is mounted is formed on the side of the security cover 210. In addition, an engagement protrusion 111 is formed in the center of the front surface of the plate-like portion so as to be inserted forward into the guide hole 436 (see FIG. 17) of the dish unit 300. Further, the lower side of the door frame main body 100 is a door frame protruding piece 112 protruding rearward, and engagement grooves 42 and 43 (see FIG. 1) formed in the door frame protruding piece 112 and the main body frame 3. Constitutes the outer ridge and the engaging portion at the lower side portion of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

(Door lens unit)
Next, the configuration of the door lens unit 120 attached to the upper part on the front side of the door frame main body 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 12 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door lens unit 120 attached to the front side of the door frame 5. FIG. 13 is a lens cover 140 of the door lens unit 120 and a lens cover 309 provided on the dish unit 300. FIG. FIG. 14 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 1 showing the relationship between the door frame when the member irradiated to the LED is removed from the members constituting the speaker covers 146a, 146b and the decorative members 149a, 149b. 5 is a front view of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the door lens unit 120 includes reflectors 122, 130 a, and 130 b having a front surface as a reflection surface, and cold cathode tubes 132 that are attached to the front and inner sides of the reflectors 122, 130 a, and 130 b. 134a, 134b and LED boards 137, 138a, 138b, a light-transmissive lens cover 140 covering the front of the reflectors 122, 130a, 130b, speakers 144a, 144b attached to the lens cover 140, and the lens cover And a lens base body 121 serving as a base of 140.

  The lens base body 121 is formed of a synthetic resin in a hollow triangular shape with an arc on the front side and an open rear surface on the back side in a plan view, and a high voltage current is supplied to the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, and 134b in the hollow interior. The inverter board 136 for supplying the power is stored and fixed. Further, an upper reflector 122 having an L-shaped cross section is attached so as to come into contact with the front surface and the bottom surface of the lens base body 121. The upper reflector 122 is made of a polycarbonate resin colored in white, and has a surface whose reflectance is increased by the white colored resin. That is, the surface of the upper reflector 122 is a reflection surface that reflects light emitted from the upper cold cathode tube 132 and the LED 137a. The side reflectors 130a and 130b to be described next are also formed of a polycarbonate resin colored in white. By the way, electrode support portions 125 for supporting both ends of the upper cold cathode tube 132 are formed at both ends of the upper reflector 122, and the upper cold cathode tube 132 is supported at an appropriate interval on the front surface of the upper reflector 122. For this purpose, a cathode tube support piece 123 having a U-shaped tip is provided. This is because the center of the upper cold cathode tube 132 is bent in the shape of a “<”, and the center bent portion is stressed and easily damaged. Therefore, only the electrode support portions 125 at both ends are damaged. Rather than being supported by the cathode tube support piece 123 at an appropriate interval, and when the upper cold cathode tube 132 is supported by the cathode tube support piece 123, the upper cold cathode is sandwiched between heat resistant rubber packings (not shown). By supporting the tube 132 so as not to move, a support structure that is less likely to break can be obtained. In addition, the electrode support portions 125 at both ends are open at the top, and an electrode insertion hole (not shown) with one side opened to receive the end of the upper cold cathode tube 132 is formed on the peripheral wall facing inward. An elastically deformable rubber sleeve 133 attached to the end where the wiring of the upper cold cathode tube 132 is connected to this electrode insertion hole is inserted from above, which is the facing direction of the opening, and then the electrode The upper cold cathode tube 132 can be mounted on the front surface of the upper reflector 122 by fitting the electrode lid 127 from above the support portion 125. In this way, the rubber sleeve 133 is attached to both ends of the upper reflector 122, and the rubber sleeve 133 is supported in an electrode insertion hole (not shown) of the electrode support portion 125 in a loosely fitted state, whereby the upper cold cathode Even when the tube 132 vibrates due to an impact or the like, when the rubber sleeve 133 absorbs the vibration, the end of the cold cathode tube 132 swings or slides on the electrode support portion 125 to cause a breaking stress. Since it is weakened, it is possible to prevent the upper cold cathode tube 132 from being damaged at the electrode support portion 125 and the bent portion of the upper cold cathode tube 132. Note that speaker through holes 128a and 128b through which the speakers 144a and 144b penetrate are formed at the left and right ends of the upper reflector 122, respectively.

  Side reflectors 130a and 130b are connected to both ends of the upper reflector 122 so as to hang down. The side reflectors 130a and 130b are also formed of a polycarbonate resin colored in white like the upper reflector 122, and have a surface whose reflectance is increased by the white colored resin. That is, the surfaces of the side reflectors 130a and 130b are reflective surfaces that reflect the light emitted from the side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b and the LED 138c. Since the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b attached in front of the side reflectors 130a and 130b are linear, the electrode support portions 131a and 131b that support the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b are provided on the side. It is formed at two locations on the upper and lower ends of the side reflectors 130a and 130b. Of course, when the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b are supported by the electrode support portions 131a and 131b, the relationship between the upper cold cathode tube 132 and the electrode support portion 125 is the same. Rubber sleeves 135a and 135b are attached to the ends of 134b, and the rubber sleeves 135a and 135b are in contact with and supported by the electrode support portions 131a and 131b. Thereby, it can be set as the support structure which is hard to be damaged even if the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b vibrate.

  LED boards 137, 138a, and 138b on which a large number of LEDs are mounted are attached to the inner side of the upper reflector 122 and the side reflectors 130a and 130b (positions that border the gaming window 101). The inner peripheral surface of the lens cover 140 described below is decorated by the LEDs 137a, 138c mounted on the LED substrates 137, 138a, 138b (LEDs mounted on the LED substrates 138a, 138b are denoted by the same reference numerals 138c). Is done.

  The above-described lens base body 121, the upper reflector 122 and the side reflectors 130a and 130b, to which the upper cold cathode tube 132 and the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b are attached, are fixed to the back side of the lens cover 140. The lens cover 140 includes an upper lens cover portion 141 corresponding to the upper reflector 122 to which the lens base body 121 and the upper cold cathode tube 132 are attached, and a side reflector 130a to which the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b are attached. , 130b and side lens cover portions 142a, 142b are formed of a transparent resin. More specifically, the upper lens cover portion 141 and the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are both formed as a white lens portion with a wedge-shaped front bulging portion formed of a synthetic resin, and the white lens portions 141, 142a, and 142b. A red lens portion (not shown) formed of a synthetic resin having a different color is connected to the inside of the gaming window 101 at the lower rear end thereof. The red lens portion (not shown) is illuminated by a plurality of LEDs 137a and 138c mounted linearly on the upper LED substrate 137 and the side LED substrates 138a and 138b.

  By the way, the upper lens cover part 141 is formed in a wedge shape with a hollow inside and opened at the rear, and is formed in a boomerang shape in a plan view. It is formed so that the distance between the cathode tube 132 and the inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip portion is close. The front lens portion 141c colored in silver is adhered to the outer side of the wedge-shaped tip of the upper lens cover portion 141, and the front bulge surface having a wedge shape in cross section corresponding to almost the entire upper lens cover portion 141 is cooled. Illumination is performed by the cathode tube 132. The side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are similar to the upper lens cover portion 141 in that the inside is hollow and the rear is open and formed in a wedge shape in cross section. The side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b are formed in a boomerang shape having a gentle curve as a whole compared with the lens cover portion 141. It is formed so that the distance between The front lens portion 142c colored in silver is adhered to the outer side of the wedge-shaped front end portions of the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b, and has a wedge-shaped cross section corresponding to almost the entire side lens cover portions 142a and 142b. The front bulge surface is illuminated by the side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b.

  In the above-described embodiment, the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b and the LEDs 137a, 138c are used as the light emitting sources arranged in the space defined by the reflectors 122, 130a, 130b, and the lens covers 141, 142a, Since 142b is molded and connected with synthetic resins having different colors, the lens covers 141, 142a, and 142b are molded with a structure and colors that are suitably irradiated by the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, and 134b and the LEDs 137a and 138c. It is something that can be done. Of course, different types of light-emitting sources are not limited to the combination of the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b and the LEDs 137a, 138c, and both may be configured as LEDs.

  In addition, speaker attachment holes 143a and 143b for attaching the speakers 144a and 144b are formed in a connecting portion between the upper lens cover portion 141 and the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b of the lens cover 140. The speakers 144a and 144b are provided with a speaker cone 145a on the front surface, and a cone support that supports the speaker cone 145a is attached from the back surface of the speaker attachment holes 143a and 143b by an attachment member (not shown). Yes. Further, the front surfaces of the speaker mounting holes 143a and 143b are covered with speaker covers 146a and 146b in which mesh-shaped covers 147a and 147b are mounted on the front surfaces. As described above, the front surfaces of the speakers 144a and 144b are covered with the speaker covers 146a and 146b having the mesh-like covers 147a and 147b (punching metal).

  Further, decorative member attachment regions 148a and 148b are formed below the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b of the lens cover 140, and the decorative members 149a and 149b are attached to the decorative member attachment regions 148a and 148b. The decorative members 149a and 149b have a shape similar to the speaker covers 146a and 146b described above, and when the lens cover 140 is attached to the surface of the door frame main body 100, the upper left and right and the lower left and right of the lens cover 140 are balanced. It is attached to give a good impression.

  By the way, the speaker covers 146a and 146b and the decorative members 149a and 149b described above do not simply cover the front of the speakers 144a and 144b or decorate the lower part of the lens cover 140 as described above, but the periphery of the speaker covers 146a and 146b. It is structured to be light decorated with LEDs. This structure will be described. First, the speaker covers 146a and 146b will be described. The speaker covers 146a and 146b have an LED substrate 152 in close contact with the back surface of a cover base plate 151 formed into a flat plate shape with a synthetic resin, while an inner speaker (not shown) with a speaker frame 154 built in front of the cover base plate 151. The lens and the front lens are covered, and the front surface is closed with mesh covers 147a and 147b.

  Next, the decorative members 149a and 149b will be described. The decorative members 149a and 149b are configured to have the LED substrate 156 in close contact with the back surface of the decorative base plate 155 formed into a flat plate shape with a synthetic resin, while the decorative frame 158 is built in front of the decorative base plate 155. The lens is covered with a lens or a decorative lens, and the front surface is closed with decorative plates 159a and 159b.

  As described above in detail, the speaker covers 146a and 146b and the decorative members 149a and 149b according to the present embodiment are the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a and 134b and the LEDs described above in the region surrounding the game window 101 of the door frame 5. Apart from the light decoration by the substrates 137, 138a, 138b (corresponding to the frame decoration lamp 842 in FIG. 41), the four corners are mainly light-decorated. Instead of being decorated with light, it can be a light decoration with strength and weakness. In particular, the light decoration on the upper left and right sides of the door frame 5 has a tendency that only a speaker is conventionally arranged, and the light decoration around the speaker is not performed. However, by configuring as in the present embodiment, the entire periphery except the lower side of the gaming window 101 can be effectively decorated with light.

(Reinforcing sheet metal)
Next, the reinforcing sheet metal 160 attached to the back side of the door frame main body 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the reinforcing sheet metal 160 is attached along the upper reinforcing sheet metal 161 attached along the upper side rear surface of the door frame main body 100 and the shaft support side side rear surface of the door frame main body 100. A pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 162, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 attached along the open side of the door frame body 100, and a lower reinforcing sheet metal attached along the bottom side of the gaming window 101 of the door frame body 100. 164 are fastened to each other with screws or the like to form a square shape.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 161 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the width of the door frame main body 100, and an upper bent protrusion 165 in which both end edges of the long side are bent rearward, A bent protruding piece 166 is formed. The upper bent protrusion 165 and the lower bent protrusion 166 are fitted into the upper crime prevention double groove 33 (see FIG. 6) of the main body frame 3. The pivot side reinforcing sheet metal 162 is also formed to have a predetermined width and substantially the same length as the longitudinal dimension of the door frame body 100, and both end edges of the long side are bent rearward. The shaft support side short bent projecting piece 172 is very short, and the outer side bent projecting piece is a shaft support side L-shaped bent projecting piece 167 formed in an L shape from the bent portion. The shaft support side L-shaped bent projecting piece 167 has a tip end bent in an L shape so as to abut on the inner side of the shaft support side portion 49 extended on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3 described above. It has become. The open-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the vertically long dimension of the door frame main body 100, and an open-side outer bent protruding piece in which both end edges of the long side are bent backward. 173, an open-side inner bent protrusion 174. The open-side outer bent protrusion 173 is inserted into the side security groove 34 (see FIG. 6) of the main body frame 3 described above, and the open-side inner bent protrusion 174 is a security recess of the main body frame 3. 35 (see FIG. 6). In addition, an engagement opening 175 is formed at the upper, middle and lower portions of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 so that the door frame hook portion 61 of the locking device 60 can enter, and covers the back side of the engagement opening 175. A hook cover 176 with which the door frame hook portion 61 is engaged is fixed. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 has a predetermined width and is substantially the same length as the width of the door frame main body 100, and the lower long side edge of the both long side edges is bent rearward. Although it becomes the downward bending protrusion piece 178 and the both sides of the upper long side edge are the upward bending protrusion pieces 179 bent toward the rear, The sandwiched portion is a vertical bent projecting piece 180 extending in the vertical direction. The vertical bent projecting piece 180 is formed in a concave shape so that the upper end edge shape thereof matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 191 of the glass unit 190 described later, and when the glass unit 190 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5 Further, the upper end piece of the vertical bent projecting piece 180 is adapted to engage with an engaging groove 200 formed along the outer periphery of the center of the unit frame 191 of the glass unit 190 in the width direction. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 177 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 103 formed in the door frame main body 100.

(Glass unit)
Next, the glass unit 190 as a transparent plate unit attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 is demonstrated with reference to FIG.10 and FIG.11. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the glass unit 190 includes an annular vertically long octagonal unit frame 191 molded with a synthetic resin having an opening larger than the game window 101, and outer peripheral front and back surfaces of the opening of the unit frame 191. And a glass plate 201 (not a glass plate but a transparent synthetic resin plate) as two transparent plates. Stopping pieces 194 are formed on the left and right sides of the unit frame 191 so as to project toward the outside of the ring, and latching projections 195 are formed on the left and right sides of the unit frame 191 so as to project toward the outside of the ring. The stopper piece 194 and the latching protrusion 195 are for attaching the glass unit 190 to the back surface of the door frame 5 as described above. Further, the glass unit 190 in the present embodiment is provided on the rear end face of the unit frame 191 at the upper part of the stopper piece 194 and projecting outward at a lateral position of the speakers 144a and 144b and an intermediate position on the shaft support side. The projected plate portion 199 for crime prevention is formed integrally with the unit frame 191.

(Security cover)
Next, the crime prevention cover 210 provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 190 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the security cover 210 is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 190 between the left and right reinforcing sheet metals 162 and 163 with a transparent synthetic resin. It is formed as an arc-shaped contact recess 211 along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 462 of the game board 4, and a post-crime projecting piece 214 protrudes rearward along the contact recess 211. Yes. Further, a crime prevention rear end protrusion 215 is formed in a slanting manner on the shaft support side rear surface with the crime prevention cover 210 attached. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 210, a crime prevention pre-projection piece 212 is projected along the lower shape of the unit frame 191 of the glass unit 190 with the crime prevention cover 210 attached, and U-shaped at both lower ends. The mounting elastic piece 213 formed in the projection is formed to project forward.

(Mounting base)
As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the mounting base 220 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the back surface of the plate portion of the door frame main body 100, and the front is opened by a transparent synthetic resin like the security cover 210. It is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape. The mounting table 220 holds the firing rail 38 between the rear surface of the mounting table 220 and the plate portion 32 when the door frame 5 is closed in order to smoothly guide the ball fired from the firing rail 38 to the game board 4. For this reason, the ball flight guide surface 227 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting table 220. By the way, the mounting base 220 according to the present embodiment is formed with a prize ball passing port opening 221 that penetrates the rearward protruding portion of the prize ball passing port covering portion formed on the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 at the upper portion on the pivotal support side. A ball feeding unit mounting recess 222 for mounting the ball feeding unit 226 is formed in the lower part on the open side. An area obliquely extending from the ball feeding unit mounting recess 222 is the ball flying guide surface 227. Further, the ball feed unit 226 attached to the ball feed unit mounting recess 222 is provided with a ball feed member that swings in accordance with the reciprocating motion difference of the hitting ball of the launcher 57, and the swing operation of this ball feed member Thus, the balls at the lower end of the guide passage portion 362 of the dish unit 300 are supplied one by one to the launch position of the launch rail 38. Further, a lid opening 223 into which a finger can be put when a side opening lid 383 (to be described later) is removed is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 220. Further, an upright wall 224 is formed to stand vertically on a part of the upper side of the mounting base 220. The upright wall 224 is for restricting the lower portion of the security cover 210 from moving forward by contacting the front surface of the security cover 210 when the security cover 210 is attached.

(Frame decoration relay terminal board)
As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, a frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 is attached to the lower support side of the mounting base 220, and a relay board cover 241 that covers the rear surface of the frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 is provided. It is attached. This frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 is provided with electric parts and electric parts (cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b, LED substrates 137, 138a, 138b, speakers 144a, 144b, 341a, 341b, a handle unit provided on the door frame 5. The wiring provided from the switch, ball rental unit 324, operation button unit 326, etc. provided in 318 is connected together, and the wiring from the frame decoration relay terminal board 240 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. Are connected to the payout control board of the payout control board box 55 and the main control board of the main control board box 25 attached to the game board 4 via a relay board or the like incorporated in the game board 4.

(Wave-receiving device)
As shown in FIGS. 2, 3, and 14, the front side of the door frame 5 has waves on both inclined portions (portions adjacent to the speaker covers 146 a and 146 b) on the upper left and right sides of the gaming window 101. Transmission / reception devices 188a and 188b are provided.

  Each of these wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b has a function of detecting a winning wave (for example, a winning wave such as a directional ultrasonic wave) output by other pachinko machines arranged around the device. Specifically, as these wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b, so-called dynamic type (conductive type) microphones as examples of sound sensors are employed. This dynamic microphone employs a system using a magnet and a coil, and employs a method of detecting the winning wave based on a counter electromotive force generated when the coil vibrates. In addition, as the dynamic microphone, one using a capacitor may be employed, and this microphone may employ a method of detecting a winning wave from a capacitance change due to vibration.

  The “right” used in the present embodiment indicates the right direction from the player to the pachinko machine 1, and the “left” indicates the left direction from the player to the pachinko machine 1. Yes. Accordingly, the wave transmitting / receiving device 188a detects, for example, a wave output from a pachinko machine that outputs a wave on the left side or is arranged on the left side. On the other hand, the wave transmission / reception device 188b detects, for example, a wave output from a pachinko machine that outputs a wave on the right side or is arranged on the right side. In this way, each of the wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b can specify the direction of the wave output source. In the present embodiment, when the wave transmitting / receiving device 188a detects a winning wave from the left, the winning wave left detection flag that was “OFF (0)” is set to “ON (1)”, while the wave transmitting / receiving device 188b is When a winning wave is detected from the right, the winning wave right detection flag that was “OFF (0)” is set to “ON (1)”, which will be described in detail later.

(Dish unit)
Next, the configuration of the dish unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 15 is a front view of the dish unit 300 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5, FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the dish unit 300, and FIG. 17 is a view seen from the rear of the dish unit 300. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the dish unit 300 is roughly divided into a unit frame 301 that constitutes an appearance, a lower speaker unit 330 attached to the inside of the unit frame 301, and an upper portion of the lower speaker unit 330. A dish body 360 disposed so as to face the upper surface of the unit frame 301, a second ball removal link unit 400 for performing a ball removal operation of a second ball removal valve 375 provided in the dish body 360, and a unit And a dish lid 430 that closes the rear surface of the frame 301. First, the unit frame 301 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 to 17, the unit frame 301 includes a top cover portion 302 having a semi-elliptical shape in plan view whose upper surface is gently inclined toward the front side, and a continuous side from the front side of the upper surface cover portion 302. A front cover portion 303 constituting the front surface and the bottom surface is integrally formed of synthetic resin. A vertical cover portion 302 a that contacts the front side of the door frame main body 100 is also integrally formed on the back side of the upper surface cover portion 302. The vertical cover 302a has a ball rental button unit opening 323 at the center thereof, and the ball rental unit 324 can be attached to the ball rental button unit opening 323 from the back side. When a ball lending machine is provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, the lending unit 324 is provided with a switch for deriving a lending command, a remaining lending indicator, and the like.

  Further, a dish body upper surface opening 305 is opened forward from the rising portion of the vertical cover portion 302a of the upper surface cover portion 302, and an operation button unit concave space portion 306 is formed at the front center thereof. LED decoration space 307 is drilled from the portion 306 along the front end portions of the left and right upper surface cover portions 302, and a first ball removal button 313 for attaching a first ball removal button 313 to the side of the dish upper surface opening 305 is provided. A button opening 313a is provided. The above-described dish body upper surface opening 305 is formed in the same shape as the upper surface opening of the storage part 361 of the dish body 360 and the guide passage part 362 communicating with this, and when the dish body 360 is attached to the unit frame 301, The storage part 361 and the guide passage part 362 of the dish body 360 face the dish body upper surface opening 305.

  A space forming member 310 is attached to the above-described operation button unit concave space 306, and the operation button unit 326 is attached to the space forming member 310. An engagement hole 312 for engaging an engagement protrusion (not shown) of the operation button unit 326 and a fixing screw hole (not shown) of the operation button unit 326 are fixed to the space portion forming member 310. And a connector 310a for wiring that is connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the bottom surface of the operation button unit 326 when the operation button unit 326 is inserted into the space forming member 310. A storage opening 310b is formed. The operation button unit 326 includes a plurality (three in the illustrated example) of operation buttons 327, and the plurality of operation buttons 327 includes an effect display device 115 provided on the game board 4 and the like. It is operated when the player participates in the game content performed in the above.

  Further, the first ball removal button 313 is attached to the upper surface cover portion 302 via a sliding support member 314 attached to the first ball removal button opening 313a of the upper surface cover portion 302, and its sliding support. The member 314 is slid in the vertical direction. When the first ball removal button 313 is pressed by the player, the rotation member 366 positioned below the first ball removal button 313 rotates about the rotation shaft 367 in the clockwise direction. The slide valve 365 linked to the lower end of the rotating member 366 moves. The slide valve 365 is always urged by the spring 369 to close the downstream end portion of the guide passage portion 362 of the dish body 360. However, when the slide valve 365 is moved by the operation of the first ball removal button 313 as described above. The guide passage portion 362 is retracted from the guide passage portion 362, and the first ball extraction passage portion 364 continuous to the downstream side of the guide passage portion 362 is communicated. Thereby, the balls stored in the storage portion 361 and the guide passage portion 362 of the dish body 360 can be extracted from the dish body 360. This structure will be further described in detail when the dish 360 is described.

  Next, the configuration of the front cover portion 303 of the unit frame 301 will be described. As described above, the front cover portion 303 is configured so as to form a front surface and a bottom surface continuously from the front side of the upper surface cover portion 302. It is inclined to the back side as it protrudes to the left and right. Thus, speaker openings 315a and 315b are formed on the left and right of the central protrusion of the front surface portion of the front cover portion 303, and the speaker openings 315a and 315b are formed by meshed speaker covers 316a and 316b (punching metal). It is covered. Then, two speakers 341a and 341b that are housed and fixed in the lower speaker unit 330 are located behind the speaker covers 316a and 316b. Note that the speaker openings 315a and 315b are formed on an inclined surface inclined toward the back side from the protrusion at the center of the front surface of the front cover portion 303, so that when viewed from the front, the pachinko machine 1 That is, it opens from the center vertical line to the outside. A front decorative plate 304 is attached so as to border the protruding portion at the center of the front surface of the front cover portion 303 to the upper and lower opening edges of the speaker openings 315a and 315b.

  In addition, a handle attachment hole 317 for attaching the handle unit 318 is formed below the open side end of the front cover portion 303. As is well known, the handle unit 318 is for adjusting the resilience of the hit ball. For this reason, a rotation operation member 318a that can be operated by the player is provided, and the rotation operation member 318a is rotated. By operating, the engagement cam 319 fixed to the rear end of the rotation shaft rotates. As described above, by converting the rotational movement of the engaging cam 319 into the sliding movement of the slide engaging / disengaging piece 231 of the slide unit 230, the strength of the elastic force of the launching device 57 can be adjusted. It has become.

  Here, the second ball extraction link unit 400 includes a second ball extraction button 401, a pressing swing member (not shown) that swings when the second ball extraction button 401 is locked, and the pressure swing member. The first link 414 and the second link 419 are attached to a link member mounting plate (not shown) in order to transmit the pressing operation (not shown) as the ball swinging motion of the second ball release valve 375. ing.

  A second ball extraction button opening 320 for opening a second ball extraction button 401 that constitutes a part of the second ball extraction link unit 400 is opened at the center lower portion of the front cover portion 303. In addition, a ball outlet for discharging the ball, which has been removed when the first ball removal button 313 and the second ball removal button 401 are operated, to the outside of the dish unit 300 is provided at the center of the bottom surface of the front cover portion 303. 322 is formed, and a fastener insertion hole 325 for attaching the operation button unit 326 is formed in front of the ball discharge port 322 obliquely. In the present embodiment, the two ball removal buttons 313 and 401, the first ball removal button 313 and the second ball removal button 401, are provided by storing the dish 360 by operating the first ball removal button 313. Although all of the spheres stored in the part 361 and the guide passage part 362 can be removed, the operation of removing the spheres takes some time to remove the spheres arranged in a line in the guide passage part 362. On the other hand, by operating the second ball removal button 401, the ball on the upstream side from the storage portion 361 of the dish body 360 can be quickly removed from the second ball extraction opening 388 having a large diameter. Time can be shortened. For this reason, it is possible to select the length of time for the player to take the ball. Further, when a big hit is made during the game, a large number of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, and when the game is continued with this being left, a saucer full tank switch 730 provided on the upstream side of the dish unit 300 is displayed. There is a risk that the game may not be able to continue despite the fact that the payout operation is stopped due to the function or the bulleting operation is stopped and the jackpot is being hit. In such a case, the second ball release button 401 is operated. As a result, the ball being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed, and at the same time, the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained and the game in the big hit can be continued.

  Next, the configuration of the dish lid 430 that closes the back surface of the unit frame 301 of the dish unit 300 will be described. The dish lid body 430 is formed of a synthetic resin as a rectangular flat plate so as to close almost the entire back surface of the unit frame 301, and a ball passage passage rear collar 433 is formed integrally projectingly at the substantially center of the front surface side. Has been. A curved upper guide rod 434 and a lower guide rod 435 for guiding the ball forward and downward are formed on the rear ball passage 433, and the dish lid 430 is attached to the back surface of the unit frame 301. The in-dish ball extraction passage is configured to face the ball extraction passage front 337 formed in the speaker box main body 331 of the lower speaker unit 330. At this time, the guide rod 338 formed on the ball guide passage front rod 337 is positioned between the upper guide rod 434 and the lower guide rod 435 of the ball guide passage rear rod 433. The passage is formed in a meandering shape, and the ball that has been removed is discharged from the ball discharge port 322 to the outside while weakening the momentum.

  The dish lid 430 has an opening lid attachment window 432 on the upper side of the above-mentioned ball discharge passage rear ridge 433, and a rectangular cylindrical award ball contact on the upper back of one end side (axial support side). A collar 431 is provided in a protruding manner. When the dish unit 300 is attached to the surface of the door frame main body 100, the prize ball communication rod 431 penetrates the prize ball passage port 103 formed in the lower part of the shaft support side of the door frame main body 100 and It penetrates to the back side, and faces the end of the prize ball passage formed in the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 in a superposed manner. The opening lid attaching window 432 is an opening for detachably attaching a side opening lid 383 that closes the side wall opening (not shown) of the second ball extraction passage portion (not shown) of the dish body 360, and is a door frame. It is provided at a position corresponding to a lid opening 105 (see FIGS. 11 and 12) formed in the main body 100.

[About the configuration of the game board]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 18 is an enlarged front view showing the configuration of the main part of a pachinko machine in which a game board having a game area and a plurality of units mounted on the game board are assembled. FIG. 19 shows the main part of the pachinko machine from the upper left front. 20 is a perspective view showing a pachinko main part from the upper right front, FIG. 21 is a perspective view showing a game board having a game area from the upper right front, and FIG. 22 is an exploded pachinko main part. It is a disassembled perspective view shown from diagonally forward.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the gaming board 4 includes a front component member 261 having a substantially circular opening 260, and a front component member 261 attached to the front side and an opening having the same shape as the front component member 261 ( A game board base 262 having a not-shown) and a transparent game area plate 81 sandwiched between the front component member 261 and the game board base 262 and closing the opening 260 of the front component member 261 and the opening of the game board base 262. It comprises. On the surface of the game area plate 81, a guide rail 78 including an outer rail 472 and an inner rail 462 for guiding a game ball into the opening 260, a main winning port unit 264, a passing gate 612, and the like are attached. A frame-shaped center accessory 247, which is a main part of the main accessory 263, is attached to the opening 98 formed in the plate 81. That is, the game area 20 is defined on the surface of the game area board 81 surrounded by the opening 260, and a number of obstacle nails (not shown) are provided in the game area 20 in a predetermined gauge arrangement. In addition, the above-mentioned main character 263, windmill 219, passing gate 612, main winning hole unit 264, and the like are arranged at appropriate positions in the middle of the above. Note that an out-out port 471 through which game balls that have not won a prize opening or the like are discharged from the game area 20 is provided at the lowermost center of the game area 20. Note that the passage gate 612 is provided with a gate sensor 760 (see FIG. 41) that detects that a game ball has passed through the passage gate 612.

  The game area plate 81 is formed by extruding a transparent resin containing a predetermined proportion of an elastic resin material (rubber in this embodiment) in a resin material such as polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, acrylic resin, methacrylic resin or the like. In addition, the extrusion direction is formed so as to intersect the vertical direction. By including an elastic resin material in the resin material constituting the game area board 81, cracks are prevented from entering even if obstacle nails or the like are driven into the game area board 81, and the damage caused by the game balls flowing down is also suppressed. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating. In addition, it is desirable to form so that an extrusion direction may be about 45 degree | times with respect to an up-down direction. In addition, the thickness of the game area plate 81 is set to a minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can sufficiently hold the obstacle nail to be placed, and the thickness of the game board base 262 is the same. The thickness is almost half.

  As a result, the direction in which the game area plate 81 is pushed out intersects the vertical direction, that is, the direction in which the push direction is a direction other than the vertical direction. When the device 115 (see FIG. 18), the translucent decorative body panel 242 and the like are arranged, the game area board 81 interferes with the dot matrix of the effect display device 115, the translucent decorative body panel 242 and the like, and moire occurs. Can be suppressed as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the presentation display device 115 and the translucent decorative body panel 242 from becoming difficult to see due to moire.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22, on the rear side of the game board 4, there is provided a decorative body unit 80 with a translucent decorative body panel 242 attached to the front surface, which passes through a transparent game area plate 81, A translucent decorative body panel 242 that can be visually recognized from the player side through the opening 260, an effect display device 115 that is attached to the decorative body unit 80 from behind and visible through the decorative body opening 249, and various substrates are mounted. A substrate holder 96 that is a base and a member that receives a game ball that is attached to the rear lower portion of the decorative body unit 80 and flows into the out port 471 is assembled.

(About the composition of the main character)
Next, a specific configuration of the center combination 247 that is a main part of the main combination 263 in the game board 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23 is a front view showing the center accessory 247 from the front, FIG. 24 is a perspective view showing the center accessory 247 from the upper right front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded view showing the structure by disassembling the center accessory 247. It is a perspective view.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the main character 263 in the game board 4 includes a center character 247 formed in a frame shape, and a light emitting character decoration 271 that is attached to the upper right part of the center character 247 and can transmit light. I have.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 and 25, the center accessory 247 is mostly made of a light-transmitting member, but it has a plated finish and does not allow light to pass through, such as mirror-like decorative members 481 to 485 and a stage back member 486. , And a stage front wall member 493 (see FIG. 23) are disposed and are partially opaque. The left side edge of the center accessory 247 has a warp inlet 234 that opens to the outside of the center accessory 247 and a warp outlet 235 that opens to the inside of the center accessory 247. When a warp ball passage (not shown) communicating with the warp outlet 235 is formed, and a game ball rolling on the game area 20 outside (left side) of the center accessory 247 enters the warp inlet 234 Then, after passing through the warp ball passage, the warp exit 235 exits and is sent to a stage 391 provided inside the center accessory 247.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the center accessory 247 is provided with a display opening 99 so that the screen of the effect display device 115 can be visually recognized through the display opening 99. Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the center role 247 has a light-transmitting center light-transmitting members 489 to 492 on the front side of the center base portion 487 formed of a light-transmitting resin, and is also light-transmitting. , A stage back member 486, which is an opaque member having a mirror-like finish plated, a mirror-like decorative member 481-485, and a stage front wall member 493 are mounted. The stage back member 486 is formed with four circular small openings 494, and a light emitting portion 410 made of a resin having translucency is mounted. As shown in FIG. 23, when viewed from the player side, the center accessory 247 has an appearance in which mirror-like portions are scattered in a portion having translucency, so when receiving light from the light emitting device, The transparent part shines and the specular part becomes a shadow or reflects light and shines shiningly, which is one of the main elements that visually characterize the pachinko machine 1.

  This will be described with reference to FIGS. The center accessory 247 is mounted by combining the members of the center frame member 530 on the player side of the substantially annular center base 487. That is, a stage back member 486 is attached to the lower edge of the center base 487, and a translucent stage 391 is attached to the player side of the stage back member 486. A center translucent member 492 is mounted on the right side of the stage 391 and the stage back member 486, and a center translucent member 489 is mounted on the left side. Each of the center translucent member 492 and the center translucent member 489 has a wave-like curved surface continuously formed from the front surface toward the inside of the display opening 99, and is smoothly connected to the upper surface of the stage back member 486. ing. A center light transmitting member 490 is mounted above the center light transmitting member 492, and a center light transmitting member 491 is mounted above the center light transmitting member 489.

  A mirror-like decorative member 485 is mounted between the center translucent member 492 and the center translucent member 490, and the joint portion of the center base 487, the center translucent member 492, and the center translucent member 490 is attached to the player. Conceal. Similarly, a mirror-like decorative member 482 is attached between the center light-transmitting member 489 and the center light-transmitting member 491, and a mirror-like decorative member 484 is attached between the center light-transmitting member 490 and the center light-transmitting member 491. The concealed part is concealed. In addition, a mirror-like decorative member 481 and a mirror-like decorative member 483 are attached to a joint portion between the other center translucent member and the center base 487. In addition, a stage front wall member 493 is mounted in front of the stage 391, and serves as a player side wall of the second shelf 393 while concealing the joint portion between the center base 487 and the stage 391. Guide the game ball to roll.

  As shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 23, the upper part of the center translucent member 489 is a display covering portion 488 having a shape protruding toward the front of the effect display device 115. The display covering portion 488 is a material having translucency and is integrally formed as a part of the center translucent member 489. The display covering portion 488 has a wavy curved surface formed on the surface thereof, like the other members constituting the center accessory 247. Although the display covering portion 488 protrudes to a position covering the front of the effect display device 115, it is not in contact with the effect display device 115 and is between the rear end of the display covering portion 488 and the screen of the effect display device 115. A gap portion 516 having a predetermined interval is provided. For this reason, when viewed from the player side facing the effect display device 115, the display covering portion 488 appears to cover the screen of the effect display device 115, but the viewpoint is moved slightly to the right so as to look through the gap. Thus, the screen of the effect display device 115 can be directly recognized. In addition, since the display covering portion 488 is formed of a material having translucency, even when the display covering portion 488 is seen in front of the effect display device 115, the screen of the effect display device 115 is transmitted through the display covering portion 488. It is visible to some extent.

  The gap 516 allows the player to directly view the screen of the effect display device 115 by moving the head slightly and changing the viewing angle, so that the viewpoint is in the range of about 30 to 45 degrees to the right. It is provided so that the effect mode behind the display covering portion 488 can be directly visually recognized by being moved. Further, in order to move the viewpoint up and down, it is necessary for the player to bend and stretch the body, and the amount of exercise increases, so the upper part from the notch edge 517 at the left end of the stage back member 486 located in the middle stage of the display opening 99 is It has a cut-out shape, and the player can directly visually recognize the effect mode through the gap 516 simply by moving the viewpoint in the horizontal direction. The gap portion 516 will be described in more detail. In order to make the upper left corner of the effect display device 115 visible, the notch edge 517 is provided at a substantially central portion in the height direction of the effect display device 115, and the display mode It is open to a height that is almost aligned with the upper end of. Further, in order to allow the player to visually recognize the rear side of the display covering portion 488 within a range up to about 45 degrees to the right, the dimension of the gap portion 516, that is, the dimension from the screen to the back side of the display covering portion 488, The size in the horizontal direction of the portion of 488 extending forward of the screen of the effect display device 115 is equal to or larger than the gap portion 516.

  The notch edge 517 is located slightly higher than the warp inlet 234, and even if a game ball that has flowed into the stage 391 from the warp inlet 234 is repelled on the stage 391, the notch edge 517 is higher than the notch edge 517. Never jump up. Further, since the game ball that has flowed down the game area 20 loses kinetic energy due to contact with the obstacle nail or the like, similarly, there is no possibility that the game ball jumps into the gap portion 516 beyond the notch edge 517.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the outer peripheral surface 515 of the center accessory 247 faces the game area 20, preventing a game ball rolling in the game area 20 from jumping into the center accessory 247, It is comprised by the smooth surface so that the area | region 20 may flow down. When the frame of the center accessory becomes thin, it tends to give a poor impression, but the display covering portion 488 produces between the outer peripheral surface 515 of the center accessory 247 and the display opening 99 of the pachinko machine 1 of this example. It extends to the front of the display device 115 to maintain the thickness of the frame so that the design is not impaired.

  As shown in FIG. 23, a character decoration receiving part 412 is provided in a substantially semicircular recess shape in the upper right part of the display opening 99 inside the center of the center accessory 247, and the character decoration receiving part 412 emits light. The character decorative body 271 is fitted. The light-emitting character decorative body 271 is mounted on the decorative body unit 80, and is irradiated with light from the back by an upper light-emitting substrate 502 (see FIG. 30) to be described later, so that a character portion with a decorative design is illuminated. .

  Hereinafter, the configuration of the stage 391 of the center accessory 247 and its surroundings will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 20, the upper surface 521 of the stage back member 486 is configured by a curved surface that undulates as a whole, and is inclined so that the player side is gently lowered. Even when the game ball bounces from the stage 391 or the game area 20 and jumps onto the stage back member 486, the game ball rolls to the player side and flows into the stage 391. The rear end of the stage back member 486 is in a position close to the screen of the effect display device 115 with almost no gap, and there is no possibility that the game ball will enter the back of the stage back member 486. The stage back member 486 has an arcuate shape that is curved downward and convex so that the left and right ends gradually increase. When a game ball rides on the stage back member 486, While rolling, it rolls toward the center, and the game ball is returned toward the center of the stage 391. As described above, the left end of the stage back member 486 extends to the middle height of the display opening 99, has a notch edge 517, and an inner peripheral surface 518 (see FIG. 24) of the display opening 99. The cutout edge 517 has a discontinuous shape. Further, since the stage back member 486 is plated and is an opaque member, the vicinity of the lower end of the effect display device 115 is concealed by the stage back member 486.

  The stage 391 is provided at a position slightly lower on the player side than the first shelf 392 and a first shelf 392 that can roll the game ball supplied from the warp outlet 235 in the left-right direction. Similar to the shelf portion 392, a second shelf portion 393 capable of rolling the game ball in the left-right direction is provided. Each of the first shelf 392 and the second shelf 393 has an arc shape in which the left and right end portions are high and the central portion is low, and between the first shelf 392 and the second shelf 393, There is a step 405 formed by partially cutting the player side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and there is a step 403 at a slightly lower position on both the left and right sides of the step 405. In addition, a stage front wall member 493 is cut out at the central portion of the second shelf 393 in the left-right direction on the player side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and the slope becomes lower on the rolling surface toward the player side. The outflow part 406 provided with is formed. The game ball that has flowed out from the stage 391 to the player side through the outflow portion 406 can enter the upper start port 600 (described later) positioned directly below (see FIG. 21). The game ball that has entered the stage 391 from the warp outlet 235 first rolls left and right on the first shelf 392 along the partition wall 407, the partition wall 408, and the rear wall 409. The partition wall 407 is notched at the level difference 403, and the game ball flows into the second shelf 393, along the stage front wall member 493 and the partition wall 407, on the second shelf 393. Roll left and right. When the game ball loses kinetic energy as it rolls, and its movement decreases and stays near the center of the second shelf 393, it passes through the outflow portion 406 according to the inclination of the rolling surface and flows out to the game area 20. . Further, when a game ball flows from the first shelf 392 to the second shelf 393 through the step 405, it goes straight to the player side as it is and passes through the outflow portion 406 to the game area 20. And leaked. In this case, since the movement in the left-right direction is very small, it is easy to enter the upper start port 600.

(About the composition of the main prize opening unit)
Next, the configuration of the main winning a prize opening unit 264 will be described in detail based on FIG. FIG. 26 is a perspective view showing the main winning opening unit 264 from the upper right front.

  First, the main prize opening unit 264 is arranged at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the game area 20 below the center accessory 247, and forms a base part of the main prize opening unit 264 from a prize opening device plate 616 that contacts the game area plate 81. A pocket-shaped upper starter opening 600 having a starter opening 596 opened upward, and a pocket-shaped upper opening 594 opened at the upper side so as to project forward. A general winning opening 602, a lower starting opening 604 that is disposed below the upper starting opening 600 and can be closed or opened by a pair of movable pieces 606, and a rectangular large winning that is disposed below the lower starting opening 604 and extends in the left-right direction. Two on the left side and one on the right side of the jackpot game opening / closing device 500 having an opening / closing door 500b whose upper side is capable of closing the opening 500a and the winning prize opening 500a and whose upper side rotates forward, Shift the inflow port 595 obliquely upward is provided with a general winning opening 614 that opens. Each of the upper start opening 600 and the lower start opening 604 includes a receiving portion for receiving a game ball and a ball passage for guiding the received game ball. The general winning opening 614 is closed at the front end surface of the portion protruding to the player side, and has an oblique upper surface opened as an inflow port 595 so as to be able to receive a game ball, so that the game ball that has entered the inflow port 595 flows out. A ball passage 376 is provided through the game area plate 81 and facing backward. The general winning opening 602 has an inflow port 594 opened upward, and a ball passage 347 is provided through the game area plate 81 and facing backward in the same manner as the general winning opening 614. The ball passage 347 and the ball passage 376 are made of a light-transmitting material and have a bowl-like shape with an open top, making it less noticeable when viewed from the player side.

  The main prize opening unit 264 further includes a start port opening / closing drive unit (not shown) that opens and closes a pair of movable pieces 606 that open and close the lower start port 604. The start port opening / closing drive unit includes a start port solenoid having a plunger that can be moved back and forth in the front-rear direction, and in a horizontal direction and a left-right direction (a direction along the game board surface) as the plunger moves forward and backward in the start port solenoid. A transmission member that rotates about an extending axis and is capable of moving a protruding pin extending rearward from the pair of movable pieces 606 in the vertical direction.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41, the main winning opening unit 264 is provided with an upper starting opening sensor 780, and a game ball that has won the upper starting opening 600 passes through the through hole of the upper starting opening sensor 780. Is detected by the upper start port sensor 780 and discharged from a discharge port formed on the lower side of the main winning port unit 264. Similarly, a game ball won in the lower start port 604 is detected by the lower start port sensor 784 provided in the main winning port unit 264 and discharged from the discharge port. The game balls won in the general winning opening 602 are detected by the general winning opening sensor 762 (see FIG. 41) disposed in the light emitting board unit 381 (see FIG. 29) constituting the decorative body unit 80, and discharged from the discharge opening. Is done.

  The jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 has an opening / closing device count sensor 776 (see FIG. 41) for detecting a game ball won in the big winning opening 500a and a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction capable of closing the big winning opening 500a. An opening / closing door 500b whose lower side is pivotally supported and whose upper side is rotatable forward from an upright state, an opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 778 (see FIG. 41) having a plunger that can be moved forward and backward, and an opening / closing device opening / closing A transmission member (not shown) for rotating the opening / closing door 500b by rotating about a shaft extending in the horizontal direction and the left-right direction (the direction along the game board surface) as the plunger moves forward and backward in the solenoid 778 A game that supports the device count sensor 776, the open / close door 500b, the open / close device open / close solenoid 778, and the like and wins the grand prize opening 500a. A ball and a casing having a guide path guiding as detected by the special winning opening sensor 370 (not shown).

  In the jackpot game opening / closing device 500, the width of the big winning opening 500a in the left-right direction is wider than the width when the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened and the lower start opening 604 is opened. The game ball is easier to win. In addition, the game balls that enter from the big winning opening 500a and are detected by the opening / closing device count sensor 776 are discharged directly below the main winning opening unit 264.

  Further, the main winning opening unit 264 is fixedly attached to the game board base 262 and the game area plate 81 so that the upper start port 600 is located immediately below the outflow portion 406 (see FIG. 21) of the stage 391 of the main character 263. The game balls that have flowed out from the outflow portion 406 are arranged so as to increase the possibility that they will win the upper start opening 600 of the main winning opening unit 264.

(About decorative body unit)
Next, the decorative body unit will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 is a front view showing the decorative body unit 80, FIG. 28 is a perspective view showing the decorative body unit 80 from the upper right front, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the decorative body unit 80 in an exploded manner. FIG. FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the light emitting board unit 381. 31 is a cross-sectional view showing a cross section of the game board 4 in AA of FIG. 18, and FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view showing a cross section of the game board 4 in BB of FIG. 33 is a front view showing a configuration of the translucent decorative body panel 242, FIG. 34 is a perspective view showing the translucent decorative body panel 242 from the upper right front, and FIG. 35 is an exploded view of the translucent decorative body panel 242. It is the exploded view which showed the structure. 36 is a perspective view showing the backlight unit 380 from the upper right front, FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the backlight unit 380, and FIG. 38 is a longitudinal sectional view of the backlight unit 380. It is sectional drawing which shows a surface and demonstrates a structure. FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a configuration around the passage gate 612 by enlarging a part of the cross section of the game board 4 in CC of FIG. 18, and FIG. 40 is a diagram of the game board 4 in DD of FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands a part of cross section and demonstrates the periphery structure of the symbol display apparatus 87. FIG. In FIGS. 27 and 28, the main winning opening unit 264 and the passing gate 612 that are originally mounted on the front surface of the game area board 81 are shown together.

  First, as shown in FIGS. 27 to 29, a translucent decorative body panel 242 is mounted on a decorative body base 243, and a light emitting board unit 381 and a backlight unit 380 are sequentially mounted on the decorative body unit base 89 behind the rear. The decorative body unit 80 is assembled. As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the game area board 81 is formed of a light-transmitting resin, and a translucent decorative body panel 242 disposed behind the game area board 81 is provided on the player side. Can be seen from.

  The translucent decorative body panel 242 is made of a resin component having translucency and an opaque component having a mirror-like finish plated with silver, like the center role 247. , It is assembled to a decorative body base 243 having a frame-like shape. In the translucent decorative body panel 242, a portion having translucency appears to be entirely emitted by light emitted from the light emitting substrate unit 381 and the backlight unit 380 provided at the rear. The translucent part of the translucent decorative body panel 242 has a slightly low resin transparency, so that the player can easily recognize the shape when receiving light from the backlight unit 380. Further, a mold having a ripple pattern or a three-dimensional curved surface is formed as a whole, and when viewed from the player side, the rear side of the translucent decorative body panel 242 looks distorted, so that it is difficult to permeate through and see the rear side. ing.

  The decorative body base 243 has a frame-like shape in which the frame outer wall portion 258 protrudes from the frame plate portion 257 to the player side in a substantially same shape (substantially circular) as the opening 260 and the inner side of the decorative body frame outer wall portion 258 is opened. Presents. As shown in FIG.19 and FIG.27, the outer shape of the frame board part 257 is a substantially square plate shape, and the rib is formed along the outer edge. The decorative frame outer wall 258 that receives the translucent decorative panel 242 has a front edge that touches the game area plate 81 when assembled and presents an appearance without gaps, thereby providing a visual sense of unity to the game board 4. .

  As shown in FIG. 30, the light emitting board unit 381 includes a board base 348 having a frame shape in which a light emitting board unit opening 266 is opened at the center, a left-side down board 344, and a right-side down board 345. The light emitting substrates 502 to 506 and the symbol display substrate 245 are disposed. Most of the substrate base 348 is formed of a plastic with high transparency, and ribs 349 are formed in an undulating shape in the front-rear direction on the edge, so that the strength is maintained. The ribs 349 are integrally formed at a lower portion of the substrate base 348 to a flow-down base 343 having a flow-down passage (not shown) through which a game ball passes. On the front surface of the downflow base 343, a box-shaped left downflow bar 344 and right downflow bar 345, both of which are formed of a highly transparent plastic, are disposed on the left and right sides of the main winning opening unit receiving part 342. . The main winning opening unit receiving portion 342 is a concave portion opened downward, and protrudes backward through the main winning opening unit receiving portion 342 when the central portion of the main winning opening unit 264 is assembled. As described above, the general winning opening sensor 762 is disposed in the downstream passage in the left downstream rod 344 and the right downstream rod 345 (see FIG. 41).

  Downstream inlets 426 to 429 are opened in front of the left downfall 344 and right downfall 345, and corresponding ball passages 347 and 376 communicate with the downfall inlets 426 to 429, respectively. , 614 can flow into the left-down basket 344 or the right-down basket 345 (see FIG. 20). The ball passage 347 is positioned in front of the translucent decorative body panel 242 in an assembled state, and is easier to be seen by the player than the ball passage 376, but the ball passage 347 is entirely transparent. It is made of plastic and is not noticeable. Further, it is difficult to disturb the light emission effect by the light that passes through the translucent decorative body panel 242 and is irradiated from behind. The ball passage 347 passes through the winning opening holes 455 and 457 (FIG. 34) of the translucent decorative body panel 242 and communicates with the downflow inlet 426 of the left downflow bar 344. The left-side down ridge 344 located behind the translucent decorative body panel 242 is visible from the player side through the gaming area board 81 and the translucent portion of the translucent decorative body panel 242. The light decorative body panel 242 has an undulating shape in the front and rear, and it is difficult to see the back side due to light refraction and reflection in the translucent decorative body panel 242, and the left-side down ridge 344 has high transparency. Since it is formed of plastic, the left-side down ridge 344 is hardly visible. In addition, the left downstream rod 344 is more difficult to be visually recognized by being irradiated with light from behind by a backlight unit 380 (described later) and emitting light as a whole. As described above, the game area board 81, the translucent decorative body panel 242, the left-flowing saddle base 344, and the downward-flowing base part 343 are arranged at positions arranged in a layered manner in the front-rear direction, and all have translucency. As a result, the functional part corresponding to the passage through which the game ball flows down is less noticeable. Further, even if the general winning opening 602 is provided in the translucent portion of the game area 20, it is difficult to interfere with the light emission effect.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 to 35, the translucent decorative body panel 242 includes a translucent resin translucent decorative body 448 to 450, and a translucent resin light emitting character decorative body 271. , Mirror-like decorative bodies 451 to 453 that are plated and have a mirror-like finish, and spherical decorative bodies 272 to 275 are provided. Further, a symbol display device 87 for displaying a special symbol and a normal symbol using an LED is provided at the lower right.

  The light-emitting character decorative body 271 is mostly formed of a resin having translucency, and a design character is shown in a conspicuous portion on the player side, and many surroundings appear as fine water bubbles. Are formed in a substantially spherical shape formed on the back side, and are attached to the upper right portion of the translucent decorative body panel 242.

  Each of the spherical decorative bodies 272 to 275 is a hemispherical three-dimensional decorative body formed of a translucent resin. Although the resin of the material has translucency, a large number of small bubble-like shapes are formed inside, making it difficult to visually recognize the back of the spherical decorative bodies 272 to 275 from the player side. Yes. The spherical decorative body 274 is formed of a resin having low translucency as a whole, and exhibits milky white color. The spherical decorative body 272 is attached to the upper left decorative body base 282 of the light emitting board unit 381, the spherical decorative body 273 is attached to the left decorative body base 283, and the spherical decorative body 275 is attached to the right decorative body base 284, respectively. The lower light-emitting substrate 503, the upper left light-emitting substrate 504, the lower left light-emitting substrate 505, and the right light-emitting substrate 506 are all mounted with a plurality of LEDs, and are disposed on the rear light-emitting substrate unit 381 toward the player side. Light is emitted, and light is produced by irradiating the corresponding spherical decorative bodies 272 to 275 with light.

  The left translucent decorative body 450 is entirely formed of a translucent resin and has a three-dimensional ripple pattern. Further, the left translucent decorative body 450 has a gate base portion 479 on which the passing gate 612 is mounted protruding forward of the left translucent decorative body 450, and an upper left spherical body receiving portion 495 on which the spherical decorative body 272 is mounted and The lower left spherical body receiving portion 496 on which the spherical decorative body 273 is mounted is formed as a spherical recess having a hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. In addition, a character decoration receiving portion 499 is formed in a concave shape corresponding to the outer shape of the light emission character decoration 271 at a place where the light emission character decoration 271 is attached. In front view, the spherical decorative body 272 and the upper left spherical body receiving portion 495 partially overlap each other. Similarly, the spherical decorative body 273 and the lower left spherical body receiving portion 496 partially overlap in front view.

  The lower translucent decorative body 449 is formed of a resin having translucency as a whole and having a three-dimensional ripple pattern like the left translucent decorative body 450. A lower spherical body receiving portion 498 is formed in a portion to which the spherical decorative body 274 is attached so as to be cut out in accordance with the shape of the spherical decorative body 274. In addition, a winning hole 455 is formed in a portion where the general winning port 602 is inserted, and a winning port hole 457 is formed in a portion where the general winning port 614 is inserted. 602, the ball passages 347 and 376 of the general winning opening 614 can be arranged to penetrate from the front side to the back side of the lower translucent decorative body 449.

  Similarly, the right translucent decorative body 448 is formed of a resin having translucency and having a three-dimensional ripple pattern. A right spherical member receiving portion 497 is formed as a spherical recess having a hole penetrating in the front-rear direction at a portion where the spherical decorative body 275 is mounted. Also, an attacker attachment portion 459 is formed in the lower left portion of the right translucent decorative body 448 in a shape that is cut out so as to be fitted when the main prize opening unit 264 is attached.

  A mirror-like decorative body 451 is attached to a joint portion between the left translucent decorative body 450 and the lower translucent decorative body 449, and a specular ornament is attached to the joint portion between the lower translucent decorative body 449 and the right translucent decorative body 448. While the body 453 is attached to conceal the structure around the joint portion, the translucent decorative body panel 242 is visually changed and the design is interesting. In addition, a mirror-like decorative body 452 is mounted below the lower light-transmitting decorative body 449 so as to be continuous with the shape of the mirror-like decorative body 453, and the left-side down ridge 344 of the light-emitting board unit 381 from the general winning opening 602, 614. In addition, the periphery of the ball passage formed to extend to the right-side down ridge 345 is partially concealed so that the rear light emitting board unit 381 is less noticeable and the appearance of the game board 4 is improved.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the decorative body unit base 89 is provided with a base opening 267 so that an effect display device 115 disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the player side through the base opening 267. On the player side of the decorative body unit base 89, a backlight unit 380, a light emitting board unit 381, a decorative body base 243, and a translucent decorative body panel 242 are stacked in layers from the side closer to the decorative body unit base 89. However, an opening is provided in a portion corresponding to the front of the effect display device 115. That is, a backlight opening 350 is formed in the backlight unit 380, a light emitting substrate unit opening 266 is formed in the light emitting substrate unit 381, and a decorative body base opening 265 is formed in the decorative body base 243. The translucent decorative panel 242 is provided with a decorative panel opening 249a. The decorative body panel opening 249a and the backlight opening 350 have substantially the same shape, but the base opening 267 is slightly large and is formed to fit the effect display device 115 having a rectangular screen. Further, the decorative body base opening 265 and the light emitting board unit opening 266 are wide openings corresponding to the entire area of the translucent decorative body panel 242, so that the effect display device 115 can be visually recognized from the player side, as well as the back. The light of the light unit 380 is transmitted through the translucent decorative body panel 242 and the game area plate 81 and emitted toward the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 31, the decorative body opening 249 is substantially the same shape as the backlight opening 350, and is in a positional relationship very close to the screen of the effect display device 115, and the central portion of the translucent decorative body panel 242 A decorative body opening 249 is provided in the depressed portion, and the appearance as if the effect display device 115 is fitted so that the screen is positioned substantially on the same plane as the front surface of the translucent decorative body panel 242 is exhibited.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the translucent decorative body panel 242 is disposed behind the game board 4, and a gap is provided between the translucent decorative body panel 242 and the game area board 81. Yes. A backlight unit 380 is disposed behind the translucent decorative body panel 242. The backlight unit 380 emits light in a planar shape toward the player side, and can transmit the light-transmitting decorative body panel 242 and the game area plate 81 to brighten the game area 20. Further, most of the front of the effect display device 115 is open, and the visibility of the screen of the effect display device 115 is ensured. The backlight unit 380 is disposed immediately before the effect display device 115, but the back of the light guide 382 is covered by a backlight rear cover 387, and the inner end of the light guide 382 is shielded inside. Since the edge 397 is formed, leakage of light from the light guide 382 in a direction other than the player side is prevented. Thereby, the visibility of the display of the effect display device 115 is not hindered by the light of the backlight unit 380.

(About backlight unit)
Next, the configuration of the backlight unit 380 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The backlight unit 380 has a backlight rear cover 387 mounted behind the plate-shaped light guide 382 having a backlight opening 384 in the center, and an upper cold cathode tube set 564 and a lower part above and below the light guide 382. A side cold cathode tube set 565 is disposed, and an upper cold cathode tube cover 385 and a lower cold cathode tube cover 386 are mounted so as to cover the front of each cold cathode tube set. Also, a first dimming board 423 for dimming the upper cold cathode tube set 564 and a second dimming board 424 for dimming the lower cold cathode tube set 565 are mounted behind the backlight rear cover 387. Yes.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the light guide 382 has four members, a first diffusion sheet 560, a second diffusion sheet 561, a light guide plate 562, and a reflection sheet 563, stacked in order from the player side. It is configured as a laminated plate. The first diffusion sheet opening 560a of the first diffusion sheet 560, the second diffusion sheet opening 561a of the second diffusion sheet 561, the light guide plate opening 562a of the light guide plate 562, the reflection sheet opening 563a of the reflection sheet 563, and the backlight rear cover 387. The outer peripheral side of the inner shielding edge 397 (described later) formed along the rear cover opening 387a is formed in the same shape, and is a hole that penetrates the entire backlight unit 380 in the front-rear direction when overlapped. A certain backlight opening 384 is formed. The backlight rear cover 387 is provided with outer shielding edges 396 protruding from the left and right edges of the player so as to prevent light from leaking from both right and left ends of the backlight unit 380. Similarly, the backlight rear cover 387 has an inner shielding edge 397 protruding along the edge of the backlight opening 384, and the light of the backlight unit 380 leaks inward from the backlight opening 384. It is prevented. The outer shielding edge 396 and the inner shielding edge 397 are formed integrally with the backlight rear cover 387, and the backlight rear cover 387 has a thin annular box shape as a whole. The light guide 382 is received in an annular recess surrounded by 397.

  The backlight unit 380 includes cold cathode tubes as light sources at both upper and lower ends. That is, the upper cold cathode tube set 564 is disposed at the upper end portion and the lower cold cathode tube set 565 is disposed at the lower end portion in a direction parallel to the upper and lower sides of the light guide 382. Each of the upper cold cathode tube set 564 and the lower cold cathode tube set 565 includes three cold cathode tubes arranged in parallel. Each cold-cathode tube emits light in three colors of red, blue, and green. By controlling the light emission state of each cold-cathode tube, it is possible to change the color mixture and the overall luminance. The light emitting state of each cold cathode tube is controlled by the first light control board 423 for the upper cold cathode tube set 564 and the second light control board 424 for the lower cold cathode tube set 565. In response to a command from the peripheral substrate 800 (see FIG. 42), the first dimming substrate 423 and the second dimming substrate 424 each cause the upper cold cathode tube set 564 and the lower cold cathode tube set 565 to emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the upper cold cathode tube set 564 is disposed between the upper cold cathode tube cover 385 and the upper light source receiving portion 566 of the backlight rear cover 387. Most of the light emitted from each cold cathode tube set is incident on the light guide plate 562. Further, the upper cold cathode tube cover 385 and the upper light source receiving portion 566 are formed of white resin, and the inner surface is smoothly finished and has a high reflectance, so that the light that is not directly incident on the light guide plate 562 is cooled. The light is reflected from the inner surfaces of the upper cold cathode tube cover 385 and the upper light source receiving portion 566 and incident on the light guide plate 562 while being sealed by the cathode tube cover 385 and the upper light source receiving portion 566 so as not to leak outside.

  As described above, in the light guide 382, the first diffusion sheet 560, the second diffusion sheet 561, the light guide plate 562, and the reflection sheet 563 are stacked in order from the side closer to the player. It is configured to be fixed with a connector. The first diffusion sheet 560 and the second diffusion sheet 561 are transparent thin resin sheets, are in a polished glass shape by surface processing, and diffuse incident light. The light guide plate 562 is made of colorless acrylic with high transparency and is formed in a flat plate shape. In addition, the surface is smoothly finished, but a dot matrix that reflects light passing through the inside is printed on the back surface. The reflection sheet 563 is a white resinous thin sheet having a high reflectance.

  When light emitted from the upper cold cathode tube set 564 and the lower cold cathode tube set 565 is incident on the light guide plate 562, the light travels through the light guide plate 562. Light that travels through the light guide plate 562 and reaches the back surface of the light guide plate 562 is reflected by the printed dots and the reflection sheet 563, and further travels through the light guide plate 562. The light that has reached the end of the light guide plate 562 is reflected by the outer shielding edge 396 or the inner shielding edge 397 and therefore travels through the light guide plate 562 without leaking outside. A part of the light reaching the surface of the light guide plate 562 is reflected at the boundary, but most of the light exits from the surface of the light guide plate 562 and is sequentially diffused with the second diffusion sheet 561 and the first diffusion sheet 560. It passes and is emitted to the player side. The light that has spread throughout the light guide plate 562 by the light guide plate 562 and the reflection sheet 563 is diffused by the first diffusion sheet 560 and the second diffusion sheet 561, and is emitted to the player side in a further equalized state. The translucent decorative body panel 242 disposed on the player side of the backlight unit 380 can be illuminated brightly as a whole.

(Passing gate)
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, a pass gate 612 is mounted on the gate base portion 479 formed on the translucent decorative panel 242 (left translucent decorative body 250) with the game area plate 81 interposed therebetween. (Here, for convenience, the game area plate 81 is not shown). As shown in FIG. 39, a gate sensor 760 is attached to the passage gate 612, and the passage of the game ball in the passage gate 612 is detected. As shown in FIG. 41, the detection result of the gate sensor 760 is transmitted to the main control board 710 (included in the board unit, see FIG. 4) via the panel relay terminal plate 750. Electrical wiring 510 is connected to the panel relay terminal plate 750. As shown in FIG. 39, the electric wiring 510 extends rearward from the rear part of the gate sensor 760 through the gate base part 479, enters the rear side of the translucent decorative body panel 242 (left translucent decorative body 450), and returns to the backlight. It bypasses the unit 380 and extends to the panel relay terminal plate 750 disposed on the rear side. For this reason, the electrical wiring 510 needs to traverse between the translucent decorative body panel 242 and the backlight unit 380, and the electrical wiring 510 is visible from the player side through the left translucent decorative body 450. ing. However, the left translucent decorative body 450 is formed with a large number of ripples, and when the backlight unit 380 is irradiated with light, the ripples curve emerges. It has become. Further, the translucent decorative body panel 242 including the left translucent decorative body 450 is composed of a decorative body on which a ripple pattern is formed as a whole, and there are many changes in brightness and curved shadows in each part. The electrical wiring 510 extending from the gate sensor 760 can be very inconspicuous. In addition, the electrical wiring 510 extending rearward from the game area plate 81 is received in the wiring protection groove 520 of the wiring protection portion 519 behind the gate base portion 479 and guided to the rear of the rib 349. In general, when wiring for electrical connection or the like is exposed in a place visible to the player, it is easy to give an impression that the degree of design completion is low, whereas according to this embodiment, the electrical wiring 510 is Although it is disposed at a position where it can be visually recognized, it is difficult for the player to recognize it, and thus the deterioration of the design is suppressed. Further, at the time of assembly, the electric wiring 510 is protected from damage such as disconnection by the wiring protection portion 519, the wiring protection groove 520, and the gate base portion 479.

(Design display device)
The decorative body unit 80 is provided with a symbol display device 87 configured to be substantially flush with the surface of the translucent decorative body panel 242, and transmits through the translucent game area board 81 to the player side. Is visible. As shown in FIG. 27, the symbol display device 87 is provided with a special symbol display 84 and a normal symbol display 82 that display by light emission of LEDs, and is a device that displays the gaming state as the game progresses. . The symbol display device 87 is configured by mounting a symbol display substrate 245 on which an LED is mounted on a symbol display case 244 in the shape of a silver-plated dolphin (see FIG. 40).

  Each of the special symbol display 84 and the normal symbol display 82 is configured by combining a plurality of LEDs, and indicates a special symbol or a normal symbol by a combination of blinking LEDs.

  As will be described later in detail, the special symbol display 84 determines whether or not the variation is stopped after the variation of the symbol is started by winning a game ball in the upper start opening 600 and won by an internal lottery process. A special symbol indicating is displayed.

  Similarly, as will be described later, when the gate sensor 760 detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 612, the movable piece 606 may be opened and closed. A normal symbol indicating whether or not the opening / closing operation has occurred is displayed.

  Since the symbol display device 87 is disposed behind the game area board 81, the symbol display device 87 can also be disposed at a position overlapping with a portion that becomes a ball passage of the game ball. As shown in FIG. 18, the game ball that has passed through the right sphere passage 236 can pass through the lower right portion of the game area 20. Thereby, the external shape of the game area 20 can be made into a shape close | similar to a perfect circle, and it becomes a clean external appearance. Further, since the obstruction of the ball path of the game ball is reduced, for example, it is possible to provide a section where the game ball rolls at a higher speed.

  In addition, the symbol display device 87 has a silver-plated appearance similar to the opaque portion of the translucent decorative body panel 242, and a curved shape that leads to the shape of each translucent decorative body. Therefore, the player can be recognized as a part of the decorative body unit 80.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 40, the symbol display device 87 is in a position that is relatively smoothly connected so that the surface of the symbol display case 244 is substantially flush with the surface of the right translucent decorative body 448. The depth to the symbol display substrate 245 is small, and is disposed in front of the light guide 382 of the backlight unit 380. That is, it is in a position where light is irradiated from the rear by the backlight unit 380. As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, a right translucent decorative body 448 is disposed in contact with the symbol display device 87, and both of the symbol display device 87 and the right translucent decorative body 448 are provided by the backlight unit 380. Light is irradiated from the rear as a whole. The right translucent decorative body 448 has a complicated shape that wraps around the symbol display device 87. However, by irradiating the entire surface with light, the right translucent decorative body 448 reaches the boundary portion in contact with the opaque symbol display device 87. The decorative body 448 can emit light.

[Structural features of this pachinko machine]
Although the structure of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has been described in detail above, the structural features of the pachinko machine 1 of the present example can be summarized as follows.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, since the light guide 382 of the backlight unit 380 covers substantially the entire rear of the game area 20, a wide range of the game area 20 is caused to emit light while having a simple structure. It is possible to produce a conspicuous appearance that is easy to call the attention of the person. Further, since the translucent decorative panel 242 has a shape that undulates in the front-rear direction, the light emitted from the backlight unit 380 can be refracted and reflected to complicate the appearance in the light emission effect. .

  In addition, the ball passages 347 and 376, the left downstream rod 344, the right downstream rod 345, the wiring protection portion 519, and the gate base portion 479 are disposed so as to be visible to the player through the game area plate 81. Is made of a light-transmitting material and is less noticeable. Further, by irradiating light from the back side to the game area 20 side by the backlight unit 380, the ball passages 347 and 376 disposed behind the main winning opening unit 264 and the passage gate 612, The eaves 344, the lower right eaves 345, the wiring protection part 519, and the gate base part 479 can be made inconspicuous. As a result, the main winning opening unit 264 and the passing gate 612 have an appearance as if they are independently provided in the gaming area 20, and the main winning port unit 264 and the passing gate 612 are relatively conspicuous. To enhance the design.

  Further, since the backlight unit 380 illuminates with reflected light as described above, it reflects from multiple directions with respect to the ball passages 347 and 376, the left downstream basin 344, the right downstream downstream 345, the wiring protector 519, and the gate base 479. By irradiating light, the contrast in the vicinity of the boundary between the light irradiating side and the shadowing side can be reduced, making it difficult to produce a sharp shadow. As a result, the ball passages 347 and 376, the left downstream rod 344, the right downstream rod 345, the wiring protection portion 519, and the gate base portion 479 can be made less noticeable.

  Therefore, it is not necessary to adjust and arrange the position of the light source for the light emission effect and the positions of the main winning opening unit 264 and the passing gate 612, and the degree of freedom in arranging the main winning opening unit 264 and the passing gate 612 is increased. be able to. That is, the backlight unit 380 illuminates the gaming area 20 almost entirely, and can produce a light emission effect in a wide range regardless of the position where the main winning a prize opening unit 264 and the passing gate 612 are disposed. . In addition, the ball paths 347 and 376 connected to the rear of the main winning opening unit 264 and the passage gate 612, the left downstream basin 344, the right downstream downstream 345, the wiring protector 519 and the gate base 479 are not easily noticeable. The unit 264 and the passage gate 612 can be made relatively conspicuous, and the possibility of impairing the interest in the design can be reduced.

  Furthermore, it is not necessary to dispose the light emitting device while avoiding the disposition positions of the main winning opening unit 264 and the passage gate 612, and the configuration can be simplified. In other words, since the backlight unit 380 extends almost entirely behind the translucent portion of the gaming area 20, the backlight unit 380 is directed toward the gaming area 20 regardless of the position of the main winning a prize opening unit 264 and the passing gate 612. It is possible to perform light emission effects by irradiating light.

  Further, the game area board 81 provided with the game area 20 is a flat plate having high accuracy and smoothness, and the translucent decorative body panel 242 disposed behind the game area 20 is undulated in the front-rear direction. It is a translucent member having a certain shape and having a lens effect. By combining the game area plate 81 and the translucent decorative body panel 242 having a lens effect, a light emission effect using a three-dimensional translucent decorative member in the game area 20 is possible. In addition, since the game area plate 81 and the translucent decorative body panel 242 that are separately formed are combined, when the game area 20 is provided on the front surface of the member having a lens effect, the thickness of the member is reduced. It is possible to prevent the problem of distortion and breakage of the member caused by non-uniformity.

  Furthermore, by making the ball passage 347 connected to the general winning port 602 provided with the inflow port 594 into which the game ball flows in and the left-side down rod 344 inconspicuous, the design may be impaired when viewed from the player side. Can be reduced. Further, since the ball passage 347 and the left downstream rod 344 are inconspicuous even if they are arranged in front of the backlight unit 380, the degree of freedom of the arrangement positions of the ball passage 347 and the left downstream rod 344 is increased. Therefore, even if the arrangement position is changed, the influence on the light emission effect can be reduced. Similarly, with respect to the ball path 376 of the general winning opening 614 and the right-side down rod 345, the degree of freedom of the arrangement position is increased.

  In addition, the electrical wiring 510 that connects the passage gate 612 and the wiring protection part 519 can be inserted into the wiring passage hole 511 and the inner guiding part 512 of the gate base part 479 and covered with the gate base part 479. Since the gate base 479 is formed of a light-transmitting material, the gate base 479 has a complicated appearance due to light received from the backlight unit 380, reduces the visibility of the electric wiring 510 passing through the inside, and allows the player to pass through the gate. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the connection between 612 and the wiring protection unit 519.

  In addition, the left-side down rod 344, the right-side down rod 345, the down-flow rod base 343, and the main control board 710 are disposed behind the translucent decorative body panel 242, and these down-flow baskets, control boards, and the like are attached to the player. It can be made harder to see from the side.

  Furthermore, the gate base 479 has a cylindrical shape, the longitudinal direction is substantially in the front-rear direction, and the front projection area is small. Further, since the backlight unit 380 emits light from the rear toward the player side, it is possible to make it difficult for the side surface of the gate base 479 to be shaded.

  In addition, the electric wiring 510 connected to the passing gate 612 disposed in the game area 20 can be guided through the wiring passing hole 511 and the inner guiding portion 512 inside the gate base portion 479. If the electric wiring 510 is disposed in a state of being exposed behind the passage gate 612, the electric wiring 510 is perceived from the player side through the game area board 81, and it is assumed that the design is poor. However, according to this configuration, the electrical wiring 510 can be arranged so as not to be visually recognized by the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the game. Further, by placing the electric wiring 510 inside the gate base portion 479, the electric wiring 510 can be arranged and protected in accordance with the shape of the inner guiding portion 512 inside the gate base portion 479, so that the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. In addition, the possibility that the electric wiring 510 is damaged during maintenance can be reduced.

  In addition, as a member having translucency, a game area plate 81 having the game area 20 on the front surface and a translucent decorative panel 242 that refracts light and enhances design characteristics in a light emitting effect are provided at positions overlapping each other. Thus, both the smoothness of the game area 20 and the three-dimensional modeling that brings about the lens effect of refracting the light irradiated from the backlight unit 380 can be achieved. If the thickness of the game area plate 81 is changed to provide a lens effect, the thickness of each part becomes non-uniform, so that there is a risk of deformation or damage during molding. Each member can be made into a suitable shape by adopting a plate shape and disposing the translucent decorative body panel 242 behind it.

  Furthermore, the translucent decorative body panel 242 is visible through the game area plate 81 from the player side. At this time, since the game area board 81 has higher translucency than the translucent decorative body panel 242, the translucent decorative body panel 242 is easily visible through the game area board 81. In addition, since the gate base 479 and the ball passages 347 and 376 are also more light-transmitting than the light-transmitting decoration panel 242, the light-transmitting decoration panel 242 is relatively visible than the gate base 479 and the ball passages 347 and 376. It has become easier and more noticeable. Thereby, the translucent decorative body panel 242 is easily visible to the player, and the game area plate 81, the gate base 479, and the ball passages 347 and 376 can be made relatively inconspicuous.

  In addition, the backlight unit 380 includes an upper cold cathode tube set 564, a lower cold cathode tube set 565, and a plurality of light emitters, and irradiates light from ends facing each other toward the light guide plate 562. Compared with the case of a single light emitter, the brightness of the backlight unit 380 can be made more uniform overall. Further, even when the upper cold cathode tube set 564 or the lower cold cathode tube set 565 fails, the light emitting effect is not immediately disabled, and the reliability of the gaming machine can be improved.

  Furthermore, since leakage of light from the side of the light guide 382 is suppressed by the outer shielding edge 396 and the inner shielding edge 397, the leaked light is reflected to the player side and the gaming area 20 and the effect display device 115. The possibility of deteriorating visibility can be reduced. In addition, the light quantity of the backlight unit 380 can be prevented from decreasing by preventing light from leaking to the side.

  Further, since the backlight unit 380 illuminates the game area 20 with the reflected light reflected by the reflective sheet 563, it reduces the irritation of the player's eyes without impairing the brightness of the light emission effect, The possibility of causing a feeling of fatigue can be reduced. That is, in the case of an indirect illumination light source that uses reflected light, such as the backlight unit 380, light that reaches the player's retina from one point of the light source, compared to when light emitted from the light source is directly visually recognized. However, since the light is reflected from the reflecting member and reaches the retina from many directions, the light flux reaching the retina is increased. By doing in this way, unlike the case where it received strong light locally, it can make it difficult to produce glare and a feeling of fatigue. In the light-emitting effect around the game area 20, it is particularly likely that the player will be dazzled or tired because the time it takes for the player to watch is long. It is possible to prevent a decrease in operation due to visual discomfort.

  Further, since the backlight unit 380 is thin and has excellent space-saving properties, it is possible to improve the efficiency of use of a limited space inside the housing and to reduce the size of the housing. Moreover, since it is hard to produce a useless space when arrange | positioning in a box-shaped space, the space in the decoration body unit base 89 can be rationally utilized. Thus, by arranging the backlight unit 380 on the back side of the decorative body unit base 89, a space in which a spherical decorative body or the like can be disposed between the backlight unit 380 and the game area plate 81 is provided. Is increasing the degree of freedom.

  Further, since the backlight unit 380 has a thin plate shape and is arranged in layers in the front-rear direction, the backlight unit 380, the light emitting board unit 381, the translucent decorative panel 242, the game area board 81, and the like are layered. It is possible to configure a gaming machine as a unit. Thereby, it is possible to rationalize the space utilization inside the gaming machine. Further, the unitization can facilitate the manufacture and maintenance of the gaming machine.

  Further, the decorative body unit base 89 has a frame shape, and the backlight unit 380, the light-emitting board unit 381 and the translucent decorative panel 242 that are provided with the left-side down lamp 344 and the right-down-down pole 345 on the front face are layered in the front-rear direction. By accommodating in the body unit base 89, a useless space is unlikely to be generated between the units, so that the space utilization of the game board installation recess 30 can be rationalized. In addition, by disposing the backlight unit 380 on the back side in the decorative body unit base 89, a transparent portion that covers substantially the back of the rear of the gaming area 20 is provided between the backlight unit 380 and the gaming area 20. A space in which the light decorative body panel 242 and the light emitting board unit 381 can be provided can be provided, and the degree of freedom of the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. In addition, by making the respective units arranged in layers in the front-rear direction as a unit, manufacturing and maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated.

  Furthermore, by providing the main body frame 3 having the game board installation recess 30 inside, it is possible to prevent a mechanism such as the ball payout device 53 from protruding inside the pachinko machine 1 and interfering with the decorative body unit 80. As a result, the decorative body unit base 89 can be enlarged, so that the decorative body unit base 89 is disposed in the interior space of the decorative body unit base 89 for disposing the backlight unit 380, the light emitting board unit 381 and the like, or in front of the decorative body unit base 89. The gaming area 20 located in front of the light-transmitting decorative body panel 242 and the decorative body unit 80 to be provided can be enlarged. Moreover, since the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported and installed, it can be opened and closed with a small force, and the convenience of the pachinko machine 1 and the vicinity of the pachinko machine 1 is improved. Can do.

  Furthermore, in addition to the light-emitting effect in the game area 20, it is possible to produce a visual effect using the effect display device 115, so that the effect can be diversified and exciting.

  Furthermore, since the spherical decorative bodies 272 to 275 are disposed in front of the translucent decorative body panel 242, it is easy to see through the game area plate 81 from the player side. Moreover, a sense of depth can be visually produced using the three-dimensional positional relationship between each decorative body of the translucent decorative body panel 242 and the spherical decorative body. Thereby, spatial interest can be added to the interest of the light emission effect.

  Furthermore, although the light is locally blocked by the spherical decorative bodies 272 to 275 and the light emitting substrate corresponding to each spherical decorative body, other portions of the game area 20 can be made to emit light. The possibility that the effect of the light emission effect is impaired by the arrangement can be reduced. In addition, even if the arrangement position of the spherical decorative body 272 is changed, the gaming area 20 can be made to emit light as a whole, so the degree of freedom of the arrangement positions of the spherical decorative bodies 272 to 275 is increased. .

  Further, the light emitting substrates 502 to 506 are provided to emit light toward the player side, thereby preventing the front surfaces of the spherical decorative bodies 272 to 275 from becoming dark. In addition, it is possible to suppress the light emission effect by emitting light that gives an impression that the light of the spherical decorative bodies 272 to 275 and the light of the backlight unit 380 are different.

[Control structure of main board and peripheral board]
Next, control configurations of the main board and the peripheral board of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 41 and FIG. FIG. 41 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and mainly showing the configuration around the main substrate 700. As shown in FIG. FIG. 42 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and is a diagram mainly showing the configuration around the peripheral substrate 800. In these drawings, bold arrows indicate connection and direction of the power source, and thin arrows indicate connection and direction of the signal.

  Control of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is broadly divided into a group of main boards 700 (shown in FIG. 41) and a group of peripheral boards 800 (shown in FIG. 42). The group of main boards 700 controls game operations (winning detection, random number acquisition and winning determination, special symbol display, prize ball payout, etc.), and the group of peripheral boards 800 has stage operations (issue decoration, sound output, liquid crystal display). And the operation of the decorative body).

  As shown in FIG. 41, the main board 700 includes a main control board 710 and a payout control board 720. The main control board 710 includes a CPU 711 as a central processing unit, a ROM 712 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 713 as a readable / writable memory.

  The CPU 711 controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a game control program stored in the ROM 712, and creates a command signal to be output to the peripheral board 800 or the payout control board 720.

  The RAM 713 temporarily stores information such as various data and input signals generated in various processes executed by the main control board 710. In addition, a command buffer is provided for storing commands (winning commands, presentation commands, etc.) to be transmitted to other boards (peripheral control board 810, payout control board 720, etc.).

  Note that the main board 700 is connected to the power supply board 395 so that operating power is supplied from the power supply board 395. Specifically, operating power is supplied from the power supply board 395 to the payout control board 720, and operating power is supplied to the main control board 710 via the payout control board 720.

  The input interface of the main control board 710 detects, via the panel relay terminal plate 750, the upper start port sensor 780 that detects the winning state to the upper start port 600 and the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 612. A general winning opening sensor 762 for detecting that a game ball has won is connected to the gate sensor 760 and the general winning opening 614.

  Further, an opening / closing device count sensor 776 is connected to an input interface of the main control board 710 via an opening / closing device relay terminal plate 754 connected to the panel relay terminal plate 750.

  Detection signals from the sensors are input to the main control board 710.

  On the other hand, a normal symbol / special symbol display substrate 768 is connected to an output interface of the panel relay terminal board 750 via a symbol limiting resistor substrate 766. As a result, the main control board 710 can output drive signals to the normal symbol display 82 and the special symbol display 84.

  Also, the output interface of the switchgear relay terminal plate 754 is connected to a normal electric accessory solenoid 774 and a switchgear open / close solenoid 778. A drive signal is output toward. Incidentally, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 774 drives a pair of movable pieces 606 provided above the lower start port 604, and the opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 778 is a jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 (more specifically, opening / closing. The door 500b) is driven.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 720 includes a CPU 722 as a central processing unit, a ROM 724 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 726 as a readable / writable memory.

  Then, the payout control board 720 processes the command signal input from the main control board 710 and outputs a drive signal to the ball payout device 53 and the launching device 57 including the launching handle and the firing motor. Thereby, the ball payout device 53 pays out the game ball according to the drive signal, and the launch device 57 can fire the game ball according to the drive signal.

  Also connected to the input interface of the payout control board 720 are an inner frame opening switch 736 for detecting the opening state of the front frame (not shown) of the main body frame 3 and a door opening switch 738 for detecting the opening state of the door frame 5. Has been.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the main control board 710 and the payout control board 720 via respective input / output interfaces. For example, when the main control board 710 transmits a prize ball command, it responds to this. An ACK signal is returned from the payout control board 720 to the main control board 710.

  The payout control board 720 is also connected to a tray full tank switch 730 for detecting that the game balls stored in the dish 360 are full. “Please remove from 360”.

  An external terminal board 56 is connected to the main control board 710 and the payout control board 720. Various information such as the winning state to the upper starting port 600 and the lower starting port 604, the variation state of the normal symbol / special symbol, and the gaming state based on the lottery result are provided in the gaming facility via the external terminal board 56. Output to hall computer etc.

  On the other hand, the peripheral substrate 800 includes a peripheral control substrate 810 and a display device control substrate 816 as shown in FIG. Note that communication in only one direction is performed between the output interface and the input interface between the main control board 710 and the peripheral control board 810. That is, even if a command is transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810, no command is transmitted from the peripheral control board 810 to the main control board 710. Further, the operating power supplied to the peripheral board 800 is supplied via the main control board 710.

  The peripheral control board 810 also includes electronic components such as a CPU 811, ROM 812, and RAM 813, and a predetermined effect control program can be executed by these electronic components.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 810 includes a ROM 819 that stores sound sources that are the basis for effect sounds and musical effects such as music, and effects such as sound effects and music that are based on the contents of the effects based on the sound sources stored in the ROM 819. A sound source IC 818 that outputs sound is provided.

  Further, the RAM 813 of the peripheral control board 810 is provided with a reception buffer for storing commands such as winning commands and effect commands transmitted from the main control board 710. In addition, as will be described later, a winning wave left transmission buffer that reserves output by storing a winning wave output instruction command when sending the winning wave from the left direction, and a winning wave output when sending the winning wave from the right direction A winning wave right transmission buffer that reserves an output by storing an instruction command is included.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the peripheral control board 810 and the display device control board 816 with each input / output interface.

  On the other hand, a liquid crystal display (LCD) as an effect display device 115 is connected to the display device control board 816. The display device control board 816 processes the command signal transmitted from the peripheral control board 810 and outputs a drive signal to the effect display device 115. Note that the display device control board 816 includes a CPU 832, a RAM 834, a ROM 836, a VDP 838, and an image ROM 839.

  The CPU 832 receives the command signal sent from the peripheral control board 810 via the input / output interface, performs arithmetic processing based on the command, and controls the VDP 838.

  The RAM 834 provides a work area for the CPU 832 and temporarily stores information included in the display command. The ROM 836 holds a program for the CPU 832 (for display control).

  A VDP (video display processor) 838 is a drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the effect display device 115. A register is provided in the VDP 838, and it is possible to hold the operation mode of the VDP 838, setting information of various display functions, and the like. Then, the CPU 832 rewrites various information held in the register, whereby the display mode on the effect display device 115 can be changed variously.

  The image ROM 839 is a non-volatile memory that stores various image data, and stores bitmap image data of various display patterns, JPEG image data for a background image, and the like.

  The peripheral control board 810 is connected to the lamp driving board 850, the frame decoration relay terminal board 240, the first dimming board 423, the second dimming board 424, and the waveform control board 425.

  A panel decoration lamp 852 and a center decoration lamp 853 are connected to the output interface of the lamp driving board 850. Thereby, the lamp drive board 850 can switch the lighting state of each of these lamps. Further, a discharge port detection sensor 854 that detects a game ball discharged to the rear side of the game board 4 (that is, an out ball) is connected to the input interface of the lamp drive board 850.

  The frame decoration relay terminal board 240 connected to the peripheral control board 810 is connected to speakers 144 and 341 connected to the door frame 5, operation buttons 327, a frame decoration lamp 842, and the like. In other words, the effect mode output to the effect display device 115 is switched based on the operation state of the operation button 327 and a drive signal is output to the speakers 144 and 341 and the frame decoration lamp 842.

  Further, as described above, the upper cold cathode tube set 564 and the lower cold cathode tube set 565 are connected to the first dimming substrate 423 and the second dimming substrate 424 connected to the peripheral control substrate 810, respectively. The dimming of each cold cathode tube set is performed.

  Furthermore, the waveform control board 425 connected to the peripheral control board 810 executes a process of generating / transmitting / receiving a waveform signal such as an inaudible ultrasonic wave in addition to an audible wave as an acoustic output. For example, when an acoustic output command is transmitted from the peripheral control board 810 to the waveform control board 425, the waveform control board 425 receives this and the process of driving the speakers 144 and 341 via the frame decoration relay terminal board 240. I do.

  Further, the waveform control board 425 is provided with a left port for winning wave output and a right port for winning wave output, and each of the wave transmitting / receiving devices via the left port for winning wave output and the right port for winning wave output 188a and 188b are connected. These wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a, 188b output waves by giving instructions from the left port for winning wave output and the right port for winning wave output under the control of the waveform control board 425, or output from surrounding pachinko machines. It is designed to detect waves.

[Functional configuration of main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, functional configurations of the main control board 710 constituting the main board 700 of the pachinko machine 1 and the peripheral control board 810 constituting the peripheral board 800 will be described. FIG. 43 is a functional block diagram schematically showing functional configurations of the main control board 710 and the peripheral control board 810.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the main control board 710 includes a game state control means 934, a special symbol lottery means 900, a special symbol display control means 702, a special symbol hold display control means 930, and a jackpot game execution means 715. , An opening / closing operation control means 938, a normal symbol lottery means 920, a normal symbol display control means 716, a normal symbol hold display control means 718, a movable piece opening / closing control means 928, and a command transmission means 946. . Each of these means is realized by the CPU 711 of the main control board 710 executing various programs (game control programs) stored in the ROM 712.

  Further, the main control board 710 includes a special symbol hold counter 903, a hold order storage means 940, a random number storage area 5131 for determining whether or not to win, a processing area 5132, and a normal symbol hold counter 923. It is embodied as a storage area in the RAM 713 of the main control board 710.

  Further, the main control board 710 includes a normal special figure determination table 906, a probability variation special figure determination table 908, a normal general figure determination table 926, and a normal symbol opening extension per hour determination table 927. Is also stored in the ROM 712 (see FIG. 41).

  The gaming state control means 934 determines which gaming state the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is, and controls the gaming state based on the determined gaming state. In the present embodiment, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is a gaming state in which the gaming state can be grasped from the appearance of the pachinko machine 1, and a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. It is controlled to any game state.

  The normal gaming state is a gaming state in which a later-described opening extension function is not activated, and is a gaming state in which the pair of movable pieces 606 are not controlled in a promotion mode described later. That is, as will be described later, the pair of movable pieces 606 open and close when triggered by the lottery process by the normal symbol lottery means 920, thereby increasing the probability of winning a game ball to the lower start port 604. However, as the operation mode when the movable piece 606 operates, a first operation mode and a second operation mode (promotion mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first operation mode are prepared. Has been. Among these, in the normal gaming state, the first operation mode is adopted as the operation mode when the movable piece 606 operates. The first operation mode is a mode in which winning of a game ball to the lower start port 604 is difficult to be promoted. For example, the lower start port 604 is maintained in a closed state, or the lower start port A mode in which the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened so as not to affect the winning of the game ball as compared to the case where the mouth 604 is kept closed (that is, even if the movable piece 606 is opened and closed) Is the same as the case where the winning frequency is maintained in the closed state). “To the extent that it does not affect the winning of the game ball” means that even if the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened and closed, the winning frequency to the lower start opening 604 is almost the same as when the closed state is maintained. That is, even if the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened, it means that the winning of the game ball to the lower start port 604 is not greatly promoted.

  On the other hand, the advantageous game state is a game state in which an opening extension function described later is activated, and a game state in which the second operation mode (promotion mode) is adopted as an operation mode when the pair of movable pieces 606 operate. It is. Here, the “promotion mode” is a mode in which winning of a game ball to the lower start opening 604 is promoted, and for example, a mode in which a longer time is adopted as the opening time of the pair of movable pieces 606. is there. That is, the “promotion mode” means that the winning probability in the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 920 is increased, the lottery time is shortened by the normal symbol lottery means 920 (the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened), and the opening time of the pair of movable pieces 606 is Up is equivalent. However, it is good also as a promotion aspect by performing only any one or two among these three aspects, and is good also as a promotion aspect by performing all three.

  In addition, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 includes an internally controlled gaming state that is difficult to grasp from the appearance. In the present embodiment, a gaming state in which a later-described probability changing function (so-called probability variation function) operates and a gaming state in which the probability changing function does not operate correspond to it.

  When the probability variation function does not operate, the special symbol lottery means 900 performs a lottery process with a predetermined low probability (first probability) of winning the jackpot. On the other hand, when the probability variation function is activated, the special symbol lottery means 900 makes the probability of winning the jackpot at least twice as high as the first probability (in this embodiment, the first probability (winning probability A)). The lottery process is performed with the second probability (winning probability B)) of 10 times. In this way, when the probability variation function is activated, the probability of winning the jackpot is at least double that when the probability variation function is not activated when the probability variation function is not activated when the probability variation function is activated. This is because it is possible to win a big hit at a stage where the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is small compared to the above, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

  In the present embodiment, a gaming state in which neither the opening extension function nor the probability changing function is activated is referred to as a “normal gaming state”, and a gaming state in which the opening extension function is activated but the probability varying function is not referred to as an “advantageous gaming state”. A gaming state in which both the opening extension function and the probability changing function are operated is referred to as a “special gaming state”.

  Note that a change from one of the gaming states to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player is performed only when the condition device is activated. Of the above three gaming states (normal gaming state, advantageous gaming state, and special gaming state), the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player is the special gaming state, and the gaming state that is most disadvantageous to the player is the normal gaming state. is there. Therefore, the change from the normal gaming state to another gaming state (the advantageous gaming state and the special gaming state), the change from the advantageous gaming state to the special gaming state, and the like are not performed unless the condition device is activated.

  The special symbol lottery means 900, when a game ball is detected by the upper start opening sensor 780 based on the winning to the upper start opening 600, obtains one random number among the random numbers for the success / failure determination generated in the random number range of 0 to 1236. The special symbol success / failure determination random number obtaining means 902 obtains them. The acquired random number is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure, and the number of the acquired random number is held to a first predetermined number (for example, 4) by the special symbol hold counter 903. Then, when the hold by the special symbol hold counter 903 is released, the random numbers stored in the success / failure determination random number storage area 5131 are moved to the processing area 5132 in the order of acquisition, and the special symbol win / fail determination means 904 wins the big hit It is determined whether or not.

  The determination of success / failure by the special symbol success / failure determination unit 904 is performed based on the random number value acquired by the random number acquisition unit for special symbol determination / determination 902 and the normal special symbol determination table 906 in the normal gaming state or the advantageous gaming state. As described above, the game state control means 934 controls the game. In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the random value acquired by the special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 is a big hit random number. If the big hit random number is determined, the big hit game execution means 715 executes the big hit game.

  On the other hand, in the special gaming state, the success / failure determination by the special symbol success / failure determination unit 904 is performed based on the random value acquired by the special symbol determination / rejection random number acquisition unit 902 and the probability variation special symbol determination table 908. The game state control means 934 controls the game. In the present embodiment, similarly to the above, it is determined whether or not the random number value acquired by the special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 is a big hit random number. Executed. However, in the special gaming state, that is, in the probability variation special figure determination table 908, the number of jackpot random numbers is increased ten times as compared with the normal special figure determination table 906.

  When a jackpot game is being executed, even if a game ball wins at the upper start port 600, the winning / nothing determination is not performed, and the acquired random number for determining whether or not the winning ball is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determining whether or not the game is successful. The counter value of the special symbol hold counter 903 is counted up.

  By the way, when the result of the success / failure determination by the special symbol success / failure determination unit 904 is determined to be a big hit, a random number of symbol random numbers generated in a random number range of 0 to 240 is acquired by a symbol random number acquisition unit (not shown). If the acquired random number value is 0 to 119, it is determined as a promising jackpot, and if it is 120 to 240, it is determined as a normal jackpot, and the effect image indicating that the jackpot game execution means 715 has won the jackpot Is played on the display surface of the effect display device 115, and a long open jackpot (a jackpot game that prompts the player to pay out a certain amount of game balls) is performed to open and close the jackpot game opening / closing device 500. . That is, the lottery process for the jackpot is performed by the determination of success / failure by the special symbol determination unit 904 and the determination of the winning type according to the symbol random number.

  Note that the special symbol lottery means 900 determines whether or not the special symbol is retained by the special symbol reservation counter 903 as described above. The cancellation condition in the present embodiment is the start of fluctuation of a special symbol, but is not limited to this. For example, when a random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained, the determination is made and the result of the determination is stored until the change of the special symbol is started.

  The determination result by the special symbol determination unit 904 is displayed on the special symbol display 84 by the special symbol display control unit 702. However, since the display is displayed by lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs, it is difficult for the player to grasp the determination result by the special symbol success / failure determination means 904.

  The number of holds by the special symbol hold counter 903 is displayed on the special symbol hold display 88 by the special symbol hold display control means 930.

  The jackpot game execution means 715 executes the jackpot game based on the determination result by the special symbol success / failure determination means 904. Here, the jackpot game is a game involving the operation of the condition device.

  The condition device operates only when the determination result by the special symbol success / failure determination means 904 is a big hit, and changes from one gaming state to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the one gaming state ( Transition) is only possible when the condition device is activated. For example, a change (transition) from the normal gaming state to the special gaming state is a condition that the condition device operates.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an unfavorable gaming state by a gaming state change lottery (a lottery on whether or not to change from one gaming state to an unfavorable gaming state by the player). However, when the condition that the condition device is activated or the special symbol is changed a certain number of times is satisfied, the game state may be changed to an unfavorable gaming state.

  The jackpot game execution means 715 operates the opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 778 by the opening / closing operation control means 938 when the lottery result determined by the special symbol success / failure determination means 904 is a probable big hit or normal jackpot, and the jackpot game opening / closing device 500 is operated. An action to open and close is performed and a jackpot game is executed.

  Here, the jackpot game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the jackpot game opening / closing device 500 is performed by the opening / closing operation control means 938 for 15 rounds. When a game ball wins the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500, the opening / closing device count sensor 776 counts the number of winning balls. Then, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls as prize balls are paid out from the ball payout device 53 to the tray by the payout control board 720.

  The jackpot game is not limited to this, and the maximum opening time of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is substantially the same (for example, 30 seconds), but the jackpot game (for example, 15 rounds) having a relatively large maximum number of times of opening. ) And a large number of prize ball payout numbers such as a big number (for example, two rounds) with a relatively small maximum number of times of opening, and one of the big numbers may be selected by lottery. Further, the maximum number of times of opening is almost the same (for example, 15 rounds), but the maximum opening time of the jackpot gaming switch 500 is relatively long (for example, 30 seconds). It may be a relatively short hit (for example, 0.3 sec).

  Here, the “round” is an opening / closing operation unit of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 at the time of the jackpot game. After the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is opened, a closing condition is established from the opened state and the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is used. It is one round until the switchgear 500 is closed. The closing condition is that a predetermined time elapses after the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is opened, or that the maximum number of winning game balls wins the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500. When either of these conditions is satisfied, the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is closed.

  The closing conditions of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 are not limited to these. However, at the time of the jackpot game, the closing condition is set so that the maximum number of winning game balls can be won in the jackpot game switchgear 500 before the predetermined time elapses after the jackpot game switchgear 500 is opened. Is preferably set.

  Next, lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 920 will be described.

  When the game ball passes through the passing gate 612 and is detected by the gate sensor 760, the normal symbol lottery means 920 obtains one random number among the normal symbol appropriateness determination random numbers generated in the random number range of 0 to 250 as the normal symbol. It is acquired by the random number acquisition means 922 for determining whether or not it is correct. The acquired random number is held to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 4) by a storage area for storing the acquired random number and a normal symbol hold counter 923 for storing the acquired number of random numbers as a counter value. When the normal symbol hold counter 923 cancels the hold, the normal symbol hit / fail judgment means 924 determines whether or not the hold is in the order of acquisition.

  In the normal game state, whether or not the normal symbol win / fail determination unit 924 determines whether or not the game is determined is based on the random number value acquired by the normal symbol correct / incorrect determination random number acquisition unit 922 and the normal normal symbol determination table 926. It is controlled by the state control means 934. In this embodiment, since 246 to 250 are hit random numbers, it is determined whether or not the random number values acquired by the normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 922 are those hit random numbers. The opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 is executed by the means 928. At this time, the variation time of the normal symbol is 4000 msec, and the pair of movable pieces 606 performs an opening / closing operation once for an opening time of 180 ms (first operation mode).

  On the other hand, if it is an advantageous game state or a special game state, whether or not the normal symbol is determined by the normal symbol determination unit 924 determines whether or not the random number value acquired by the normal symbol determination unit random number acquisition unit 922 and the normal symbol open / extended extended time determination table 927. Control is performed by the gaming state control means 934 so as to be performed based on the above. In the present embodiment, since 1 to 250 is a hit random number, it is determined whether or not the random number values acquired by the normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 922 are those hit random numbers. The opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 is executed by the means 928. At this time, the variation time of the normal symbol is 1024 msec, and the pair of movable pieces 606 executes the opening / closing operation with an opening time of 1300 msec three times and the opening / closing operation with an opening time of 856 msec twice.

  As described above, in the advantageous game state or the special game state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the lower start port 604 is dramatically improved as compared with the normal game state. Therefore, in the advantageous game state or the special game state, the lottery opportunities for special symbols increase dramatically, the expectation that a jackpot game will be executed increases, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, whether or not the normal symbol is determined by the normal symbol determination unit 924 is determined to be a win even in the outside normal game state, and the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 can be executed. Thus, the hit probability may be zero when in the normal gaming state. That is, the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 may be performed only in the advantageous game state or the special game state.

  The determination result by the normal symbol appropriateness determination unit 924 is displayed on the normal symbol display 82 by the normal symbol display control unit 716. Further, the number of holds by the normal symbol hold counter 923 is displayed on the normal symbol hold display 92 by the normal symbol hold display control means 718.

  The movable piece opening / closing control means 928 operates the normal electric accessory solenoid 774 to open / close the pair of movable pieces 606 when the lottery result determined by the normal symbol appropriateness determination means 924 is winning. However, as described above, the opening / closing operation mode of the pair of movable pieces 606 is different between the advantageous game state or the special game state and the normal game state (the advantageous game state or the special game state). In this case, the winning of the game ball to the lower start port 604 is made easier than in the normal game state).

  In the present embodiment, when the pair of movable pieces 606 are closed, it is impossible to win a game ball in the lower start port 604, and the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened and closed. The winning of the game ball to the lower start port 604 is easier than the winning of the game ball to the upper start port 600. However, when the pair of movable pieces 606 are closed, it is not limited to a mode in which winning of the game ball to the lower start port 604 is impossible, and winning of the game ball to the lower start port 604 is made to the upper start port 600. If it is more difficult than winning a game ball.

  The command transmission unit 946 transmits the lottery result by the special symbol success / failure determination unit 904 and information related to the lottery result to the peripheral board 800. The “information related to the lottery result” corresponds to a variation time of the decorative symbol performed in the effect display device 115.

  It should be noted that the determination result by the special symbol determination unit 904 and the normal symbol determination unit 924 does not necessarily include a loss.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control board 810 includes command receiving means 950, effect lottery means 960, and effect control means 962, as shown in FIG. Each of these means is realized by the CPU 811 of the peripheral control board 810 executing various programs (production control programs) stored in the ROM 812.

  The command receiving unit 950 receives the determination result transmitted from the main control board 710 by the special symbol determination unit 904 and information related to the determination result.

  The effect lottery means 960 determines the effect mode displayed on the effect display device 115, and accordingly, the effect sound output from the speakers 144, 341, the effect sound such as music, and the lamps 842, 852, 853 The display is determined. The effect control unit 962 performs control based on the effect mode and display determined by the effect lottery unit 960. Specifically, information is transmitted to the display device control board 816 so that the effect mode determined by the effect lottery means 960 is displayed on the effect display device 115, and the effect sound and the display determined accordingly are displayed. Control is performed via the frame decoration relay terminal board 240 so as to be output and displayed from the speakers 144 and 341 and the frame decoration lamp 842. Further, the display on the panel decoration lamp 852 and the center decoration lamp 853 is also controlled via the lamp driving board 850.

  The effect lottery means 960 also has a function of determining the execution range of the “interlocked expected effect”, the effect progression direction, and the transmission timing of the winning wave, as will be described later, when the lottery result of the own device is a win. doing. Further, the effect control means 962 performs light emission control of an interlocking effect notification lamp (for example, a frame decoration lamp 842) as a “notice effect” to be described later, or a special interlocking image (for example, a fish school effect) as the “interlocking expected effect”. The display control is also performed. It is this effect control means 962 that determines the effect start timing of the “interlocked expected effect” in the own machine.

[Production control on main control board and peripheral control board]
Here, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44, control operations related to various effects executed by the pachinko machine 1 among the various controls executed by the main control board 710 and the peripheral control board 810 will be described. . FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating an example of the contents of the variation pattern table.

  In the main control board 710 shown in FIGS. 41 and 43, the CPU 711 executes a game control program stored in the ROM 712, thereby controlling various games performed in the pachinko machine 1. This game control program executes an internal lottery process (big hit lottery) determination in response to the start winning prize, and if the big win lottery is won, the winning flag is set to “1 (ON)”. If it is not won, “0 (OFF)” is set in the winning flag. That is, this winning flag (big hit flag) is a flag indicating whether or not the big win lottery has been won.

  In the main control board 710, command transmission processing is executed in interrupt processing executed every 4 ms, for example. In this command transmission process, when a command to be transmitted is stored in the command buffer, the stored command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 810 and the payout control board 720. That is, in this command processing, when there is a command reserved for transmission in the command buffer, the command reserved for transmission is transmitted. In the present embodiment, the game control program transmits an effect command including information related to the winning flag (hereinafter referred to as “winning information”) and a variation time to the peripheral control board 810 in the command transmission process. .

  The “variation time” is the variation time of the variation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 84, and executes a reach effect or the like (single expected effect described later) displayed on the effect display device 115. This corresponds to the power time (specifically, the time from when the decorative design on the effect display device 115 starts changing until it stops). Then, as will be described later, in the winning pachinko machine 1, an expected interlocking effect (for example, a fish school effect) described later is performed in a manner in which a plurality of pachinko machines are interlocked within the range of the fluctuation time.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 810 shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the CPU 811 executes the effect control program stored in the ROM 812, whereby various effects performed in the pachinko machine 1 are controlled. That is, this effect control program controls the following expected effects, such as controlling the effect operation accompanying the progress of the game using the RAM 813 as a work area. This “expected effect” is a kind of effect operation that implies that, for example, the stop symbol after fluctuation may be in a predetermined display mode (for example, a display mode in which the same symbols are arranged in a line). In other words, this expected effect is an effect operation that gives the player a sense of expectation that they may win in the jackpot lottery. Here, the peripheral control board 810 refers to the reception buffer in the command reception process included in the interrupt process periodically executed, for example, every 2 ms, and determines whether a command or the like is stored in the reception buffer. .

  The effect control program analyzes the received effect command and controls the expected effect according to the effect command. Specifically, the effect control program obtains an execution command corresponding to the effect command based on the winning information and the change time included in the effect command with reference to the change pattern table shown in FIG. In addition to the above-described winning information and variation time, this execution command includes information on variation details, fish production start point (details will be described later), and fish production start time (details will be described later). An expected effect is executed based on the execution command.

  In this “expected effect”, various effect images are displayed on the effect display device 115 via the display device control board 816, and various lamps 852, 853, 842 and a cooling cathode tube set 564 are also transmitted via the other substrates. 565 is turned on, audio is output from the speakers 144 and 341, and other various items and decorations are driven. This “expected effect” is an effect mode that is performed in conjunction with a “single expectation effect” that is an effect mode performed independently by the own pachinko machine 1 and a plurality of pachinko machines 1 (game machine rows). It consists of “Interlocked Expectation Production”.

  For example, when the effect control program performs the expected effect based on the execution command “03H”, the pachinko machine 1 has “2016 ms” as the “single expected effect” and the effect equivalent to “normal reach per” as well as the decorative pattern change display. After the period, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and “winning” is derived as a lottery result. Since the winning information of the execution command “03H” is “winning”, the fish production production start point “B” and the fish production production start time “a” are used as the “interlocking expected production” together with the above “normal reach” production. A special effect image (fish school effect) is executed, details of which will be described later.

  Note that the image ROM 839 of the display device control board 816 stores character data related to the effect video used in the reach effect or jackpot, for example, in addition to the character data related to the effect video used in the normal gaming state. Further, the image ROM 839 stores character data related to an effect image (first effect image) in which an effect medium (for example, a school of fish) progresses from right to left, for example. Character data relating to the effect image (second effect image) in which (for example, a school of fish) progresses is also stored. The VDP 838 acquires character data from the image ROM 839 under the control of the CPU 832 and displays various effect images on the effect display device 115 based on the character data.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is executed independently in accordance with the progress of the game, such as an effect image based on the character data related to the effect video used in the normal game state, reach effect (single expectation effect) or jackpot. The effect image is called “game effect image”. In addition, when implying that the player wins or wins in the jackpot lottery, the effect images (first effect image and second effect image) displayed in conjunction with the plurality of pachinko machines 1 are linked. This is called a “special interlocking image” that is displayed during the expected performance. Further, the character data necessary for displaying the first effect image is referred to as first effect image data, and the character data required for displaying the second effect image is referred to as second effect image data.

[Interlocking expected effect control on peripheral control board and waveform control board]
Here, among the effect control executed on the peripheral control board 810 and the waveform control board 425, the control related to the interlocked expected effect executed in conjunction with the plurality of pachinko machines 1 will be described.

  As described above, in the winning pachinko machine 1, when the presentation command received by the peripheral control board 810 includes winning information indicating winning of the jackpot, the presentation control program is transmitted via the waveform control board 425 to the wave transmitting / receiving device. The winning wave is output from 188a and 188b, and the linked expectation effect is executed in conjunction with the other pachinko machine 1 that has received the winning wave.

  As the winning wave, for example, an inaudible wave that cannot be obtained by human senses is preferably used, but a wave that can be obtained by human senses may be used in part. Examples of waves that cannot be acquired by human senses include sound waves such as ultrasonic waves. That is, each of the wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b detects a wave including this information, for example, outputting a wave including information exchangeable between a plurality of pachinko machines.

(Control action in the pachinko machine that transmits the winning wave)
With reference to FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, the control operation in the pachinko machine 1 (winning pachinko machine 1) that transmits the winning wave will be described. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect progress direction selection table. FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating an example of the contents of the output direction distribution table.

  First, in the pachinko machine 1 that transmits the winning wave, the effect control program refers to the effect progress direction selection table shown in FIG. 45 and is performed in conjunction with a plurality of pachinko machines based on randomly acquired random values. Determine the direction in which the linked expected performance will proceed. The effect progress direction selection table determines whether to execute the interlocked expected effect according to the randomly acquired random value, and in which direction to execute the interlocked expected effect, Production direction information for determining the direction is managed.

  Then, the production control program refers to the output direction distribution table shown in FIG. 46, and based on the random value acquired at random, the left and right direction (arrangement direction of the gaming machine train) based on its own pachinko machine 1 Determine the number of pachinko machines that will be linked to the expected production and distribute the output direction of the winning wave. In the output direction distribution table, the number of the winning wave as viewed from the winning pachinko machine 1 in either one direction or the other direction along the arrangement direction of the gaming machine row is determined according to the randomly obtained random value. It manages output distribution information for determining whether it should be output. In other words, this output direction distribution table is for determining the range of the pachinko machines that are to be subjected to the interlocking expected effect among the plurality of pachinko machines that constitute the gaming machine train.

  In this way, when the winning control lottery is won, the production control program selects the direction in which the linked expected production proceeds in the gaming machine row, and the direction in which the gaming machine row is arranged as the direction in which the winning wave is to be output. And a function of selecting at least one of the one direction and the other direction.

  Then, the waveform control board 425 performs control so that the amplitude of the selected wave output from each of the wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b can be output in a changeable manner in accordance with the instruction of the effect control program. That is, when the waveform control board 425 is won in the jackpot lottery (when the winning flag = ON), the winning wave output from each of the wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b is linked and expected in the gaming machine train. The output is output as an amplitude determined according to the distance to the pachinko machine that should be positioned at the end of the pachinko machine that is to perform the performance (hereinafter referred to as the most pachinko machine). At this time, the waveform control board 425 outputs the selected wave to the wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b independently according to the instruction of the effect control program, including the intensity information regarding the magnitude of the output amplitude in the selected wave. It is possible to make it. In the present embodiment, the waveform control board 425 outputs the winning wave including the intensity information because another pachinko machine that has received the winning wave acquires the attenuation amount of the amplitude of the received winning wave. This is because it is used as a standard.

  Further, the waveform control board 425 controls the wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b in accordance with the instruction of the effect control program, and is determined as described above in the output direction of the winning wave determined based on the output direction distribution table. The winning wave is output with the specified amplitude. Specifically, when the output direction selected as described above is one direction along the arrangement direction of the gaming machine rows, the effect control program gives an instruction to the waveform control board 425 to transmit and receive the wave transmitting / receiving device 188a. , 188b is controlled to output a winning wave in one direction. In addition, when the output direction selected as described above is the other direction along the arrangement direction of the gaming machine trains, the effect control program gives an instruction to the waveform control board 425 and sets the wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b. Either one is controlled and the winning wave is output in the other direction. Thereby, the winning wave can be transmitted in one direction or the other direction from the winning pachinko machine 1 that outputs the winning wave as a starting point over the range of the pachinko machine that is the execution target of the interlocking expected effect.

  Here, in accordance with the instruction of the effect control program, the waveform control board 425 is first arranged on the upstream side of the effect progression direction as viewed from the winning pachinko machine 1 (that is, the direction in which the end pachinko serving as the starting point of the linked expected effect is located). A primary winning wave is output, and a secondary winning wave is output after a predetermined period. On the other hand, only the primary winning wave is output to the downstream side in the direction of the effect as viewed from the winning pachinko machine 1. In other words, in the winning pachinko machine 1, when the winning wave is transmitted, the primary winning wave is first transmitted to both the upstream side and the downstream side in the direction of the effect progress, and only after the predetermined period has passed, only upstream of the direction of the effect progress. Send secondary winning wave. As described above, the waveform control board 425 varies the number of times the winning wave is transmitted according to the output direction. The pachinko machine that has received the winning wave is upstream of the direction of the effect as viewed from the winning pachinko machine 1. This is to specify whether the current is on the downstream side.

  In the present embodiment, the primary winning wave and the secondary winning wave are signals having the same contents, but information for identifying the type of the winning wave (whether it is the primary winning wave or the secondary winning wave) May be included. In addition, in order to identify that the primary winning wave and the secondary winning wave are output from the same winning pachinko machine 1, identification information (such as an ID unique to the pachinko machine) of the transmission source pachinko machine 1 is included. You may not.

  As described above, the winning wave is transmitted from the pachinko machine 1 that has won the jackpot to the surrounding pachinko machine that is the execution target of the interlocking expectation effect with the winning pachinko machine 1 as a starting point. And in the several pachinko machine which becomes the execution object of this interlocking expected effect, an interlocking expectation effect is performed along an effect progress direction from the endmost pachinko machine so that it may mention later. By the way, in this embodiment, in a plurality of pachinko machines that are targets of execution of the interlocking expected effect, when receiving the winning wave, the interlocking effect notification lamp (for example, the frame decoration lamp 842) is turned on as a notice effect as described later. Among these pachinko machines, the fish school effect is actually executed as the interlocked expectation effect from the extreme pachinko machine that is the starting point of the interlocked expectation effect to the winning pachinko machine 1. Therefore, when the pachinko machine that has received the winning wave is located downstream of the winning pachinko machine 1 in the direction of the effect progression, the pachinko machine does not execute the fish school effect as the interlocking expected effect, which will also be described later.

(Regarding the start timing of linked expected production)
Here, determination of the timing for starting the interlocking expected effect (here, the fish school effect) when the winning pachinko machine 1 transmits the winning wave will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a fish production start point table in which (1) indicates the start point of the interlocking expected effect (fish school production start point), and (2) is the fish school effect that indicates the start time of the interlocking expected effect (fish school effect start time). It is a start time table.

  In the winning pachinko machine 1 that is the transmission source of the winning wave, the effect control program corresponds to the effect command received by the peripheral control board 810 with reference to the fish effect start point table and the fish effect start time table shown in FIG. It is possible to control the start point (see FIG. 47 (1)) of the interlocking expected effect corresponding to the execution command (see FIG. 44) and the time (see FIG. 47 (2)) to start the interlocking expected effect. That is, the optimum fish school production start point and the fish school production start time can be determined according to the production command (specifically, the variation time in the execution command).

  In addition, the start point of the linked expectation effect (fish school effect start point) is the end point when the change display of the decorative symbol and the reach effect (the above-mentioned single expectation effect) shift to in the selected pachinko machine 1 Indicates whether a fish production will be started as a linked expected production from a pachinko machine. In addition, the start time of the linked expectation effect (fish school production start time) indicates how many seconds after the fish production production start point corresponds to the start of symbol variation in the winning pachinko machine. For example, if the fish production start point is “at the start of change”, the fish production start time is always “0 seconds”, so that the symbol change starts at the winning pachinko machine (that is, the symbol change at the winning pachinko machine). After 0 seconds from the beginning), the interlocking expectation effect is started from the most advanced pachinko machine.

  When the fish production production start point is determined, the production control program determines, from the start point, a point from the start of the change to the end of the change by the lottery to start the fish production. For example, in the case of the execution command “03H”, the fish school production start point corresponds to “B” in the table of FIG. 46 (1), and therefore the point for performing the fish school production as the interlocking expected production is at the start of fluctuation. The probability is set in advance to be 40%, 30% when the upper symbol is stopped, 30% when the reach is displayed, and 0% when the lower symbol is stopped, immediately before the end of the first half, at the start of the second half, and immediately before the end of the second half. Points that are 0% are never selected.

  In the present embodiment, when the lower symbol is stopped, immediately before the end of the first half, at the start of the second half, and at the start of the second half, the fish production start is set to 0% for the purpose of ending the fish production within the range of the fluctuation time. Because. When there is a possibility of fish production at the above point, for example, when a fish production with a long production time is determined based on the execution command, the fish production start point where the fish production cannot be finished within the fluctuation time The situation that the school of fish production starts from. Then, as a result, in the winning pachinko machine 1, there is a possibility that there will be a sense of incongruity such as a school of fish not yet coming despite the fact that the fluctuation has ended (the jackpot has been decided). This is because, if a player encounters an unfavorable state, the player may be struck with a big hit.

  Further, when the point for performing the fish school effect as the interlocked expected effect is determined as described above, the effect control program determines the fish school according to the point based on the fish effect start time determined based on the execution command. The production start time is specifically determined. For example, when the execution command is “03H”, the fish school production start time corresponds to “a” in the table of FIG. 47 (1), and therefore the fish school production starts at “at the start of change” as described above. When it is determined by lottery (see FIG. 47 (1)), time information (0 ms) of “at the start of change” is inevitably selected in “a” in the fish production start time table (FIG. 47 ( 2)). The time information of “at the start of change” of “0 ms” indicates that the fish school effect is performed 0 ms after the start of change.

  In the table of FIG. 47 (1), the most probable start point probability of the fish school production is assigned to “at the start of fluctuation” because the fish school production as the “interlocked expectation production” from the earlier stage within the fluctuation time. By doing so, the appearance time of the school of fish will inevitably become longer, and as many players as possible can feel the expectation.

  Here, “fish school production is performed” means not only to display a special interlocking image (fish school image), which is a special production video, on the production display device 115 of the pachinko machine 1 that has won the jackpot lottery. A series of effects in which a school of fish is displayed in order from a predetermined direction on the effect display device of each pachinko machine in conjunction with each pachinko machine in the adjacent gaming machine row that has received the winning wave output from the winning pachinko machine 1 It also includes operations.

  In this way, in the winning pachinko machine 1 where the fish school production is scheduled to be performed, the start point and the start time of the fish school production are determined by the above method, so that even the pachinko machine winning the jackpot lottery starts to change. From the point until the end of the change, the point at which the fish production starts is different every time. Then, the player of the winning pachinko machine 1 says that his stand may be a big hit between the blinking of the interlocking effect notification lamp (for example, the frame decoration lamp 842) and the end of the school of fish production in each pachinko machine. Continue to expect. Similarly, even for a pachinko machine that has not won the jackpot lottery, the player keeps the inside from the time when the linked performance notification lamp blinks until the school of fish production ends (until the blinking of the linked performance notification lamp ends) Continuing the expectation that he may have won in a typical lottery. That is, even if a reach effect or the like is not particularly performed when the lamp is turned on, even if it is a so-called normal fluctuation state, the interlocking effect notification lamp blinks, so that a sense of expectation for the jackpot can be enhanced.

  In this embodiment, “D” in the fish production start point table shown in FIG. 47 (1) shows the fish production start at all points from the start of the change until the end of the second half (except when the lower symbol is stopped). Probability is allocated. “Just before the end of the second half” means that, for example, of the three symbols, the upper symbol is stopped, the lower symbol is stopped, and the central symbol is stopped immediately before, or just before the end of the reach production performed in the middle of fluctuation And the like. The fact that the fish production starts “just before the end of the second half” is the same as the normal state from the start of the change to the end of the second half (before the start point of the fish production), It may be.

  The “fluctuating state of loss” is, for example, the state where one symbol (for example, the upper symbol) stops at “3” and the other symbol (for example, the lower symbol) stops at “4”, and finally the center Although the symbol is still changing, it is a changing state that seems to be unmistakable no matter what number the central symbol stops. Such a situation, rather than expecting the player to win, gives stress and lowers interest.

  However, in the present embodiment, the fish school effect can be started even in the “fluctuating state of loss” as described above. In this way, even when the upper symbol is stopped at “3” and the lower symbol is stopped at “4” as described above, it is possible to cause a fluctuation behavior such that the center fluctuation is lengthened.

  As described above, in this embodiment, there is a possibility that it will be a big hit even during the fluctuation state of the loss, so once the interlocking effect notification lamp is lit, each pachinko machine in the lit gaming machine row All of the players can have a sense of expectation that “your stand may be a hit”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control program refers to the table shown in FIG. 47 (fish school effect start point table and fish school effect start time table), and the effect mode (symbol variation mode) in the own pachinko machine 1. It is determined in what state the linked expected effect is executed (that is, the start point of the fish school effect). In other words, it is determined how many seconds after the start of symbol variation in the winning pachinko machine 1 to execute the linked expected effect (that is, the start time of the fish school effect). Then, the production control program uses the fish production production start point (fish production production start time) determined as described above as the winning wave output timing, and when it reaches the output timing in its own pachinko machine 1, the waveform control board 425. The winning wave is output by controlling.

(Control action in a pachinko machine that receives the winning wave)
On the other hand, the waveform control board 425 has a function of analyzing the selected wave detected by each of the wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b and acquiring the amplitude of the selected wave. Hereinafter, the control operation in the pachinko machine 1 (reception pachinko machine 1) that receives the winning wave will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an example of the attenuation determination table.

  Here, in the reception pachinko machine 1 that is the transmission destination of the winning wave, the effect control program attenuates according to the transmission distance until the winning wave output by the winning pachinko machine 1 is received by the own pachinko machine 1. Based on the amount of attenuation of the amplitude of the selected wave detected by the waveform control board 425, the above-described intensity information is considered as a reference amplitude value, and the function of determining the execution timing of the linked expected effect from the amount of attenuation is provided. Have. Note that, instead of the intensity information included in the winning wave, the intensity information stored in advance in each receiving pachinko machine 1 is considered as a reference amplitude value, and the execution timing of the linked expected effect is determined from the attenuation amount. Good.

  At this time, when the production control program calculates the attenuation amount of the winning wave detected by the waveform control board 425, based on the intensity information (reference amplitude value), the amplitude (output) It is calculated whether the amplitude of the detected winning wave is attenuated compared to the amplitude at the time of output. More specifically, the presentation control program of the reception pachinko machine 1 refers to the attenuation determination table as shown in FIG. 48 based on the amplitude attenuation of the winning wave detected by the waveform control board 425. The execution timing of the interlocking expected effect is determined from the attenuation amount. That is, when each pachinko machine sequentially performs the interlocking expected production according to the arrangement order of each pachinko machine from the most pachinko machine to the winning pachinko machine, its own pachinko machine 1 between the most pachinko machine and the winning pachinko machine 1 In order to correspond to this position, the effect timing at which the own device should execute the interlocked expected effect is acquired from the amount of attenuation of the winning wave.

  Here, the relationship between the amount of attenuation of the amplitude of the winning wave and the distance from the winning pachinko machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 exemplifies the number of arrangements (distances) as viewed from the winning pachinko machine when the combined expectation effect is executed with a total of seven machines from the winning pachinko machine to the most end pachinko machine.

  For example, according to the attenuation determination table as shown in FIG. 48, in the reception pachinko machine 1, if the attenuation of the winning wave is less than 10% with reference to the intensity information (reference amplitude value), the pachinko machine Since machine 1 is located at the first (ie, adjacent position) from the winning pachinko machine, and the distance from the winning pachinko machine is 20 cm, it is a pachinko machine (excluding the winning pachinko machine) where the interlocking expectation effect is performed. The latest 7500 ms later is determined as the start timing. The distance from the winning pachinko machine is 20 cm. For example, when a winning wave is output from the wave receiving / receiving device 188a from the winning pachinko machine, the wave receiving / receiving device 188b of the first other pachinko machine (adjacent pachinko machine) is used. When this winning wave is received, the distance between the wave transmitting / receiving device 188a of the winning pachinko machine and the wave receiving / receiving apparatus 188b of the adjacent pachinko machine is slightly larger than the lateral width of the inter-bed sand (not shown) (here, 20 cm). ).

  In the second and subsequent gaming machines, the winning wave output from the wave receiving / receiving device 188a of the winning pachinko machine is received by the wave receiving / receiving device 188b of each pachinko machine. The wave transmission / reception device 188b is the distance from the wave transmission / reception device 188b of the first pachinko machine to each wave transmission / reception apparatus 188b (that is, 60 cm corresponding to the total value of the horizontal width of the pachinko machine 1 and the horizontal width of the inter-sand). Only the attenuated winning wave is received, and the distance from the winning pachinko machine is 80 cm. Then, with the pachinko machine (excluding the winning pachinko machine) where the interlocking expectation effect is performed, the next latest 6400 ms later is determined as the start timing.

  Similarly, for the third and subsequent units, the winning wave attenuated by the distance of each wave transmitting / receiving device 188b is received at each pachinko machine, and the start timing of the interlocking expected effect according to the distance from the winning pachinko machine from the attenuation amount Is determined. And in the most advanced pachinko machine (that is, the 6th pachinko machine as seen from the winning pachinko machine), the distance from the winning pachinko machine is 320 cm, and the pachinko machine (the winning pachinko machine that is expected to be linked) is performed. The earliest after 2000 ms is determined as the start timing.

  In the present embodiment, the winning pachinko machine does not receive the winning wave output by the own machine (or is invalidated even if it is received), but it is the execution target of the interlocking expected effect as with the receiving pachinko machine. To be judged. Therefore, the effect control program of the winning pachinko machine 1 determines a start timing that is the slowest among all the pachinko machines that perform the interlocking expected effects including the winning pachinko machine. Specifically, this production control program is not the amount of attenuation of the winning wave amplitude, but the start timing of the fish production determined by the aircraft as described above (the transmission timing of the winning wave) and the linkage determined by the aircraft. Based on the execution range of the expected production, the production timing to execute the linked expected production on the own machine is acquired. For example, the start point of the fish production (the start time of the fish production) is “at the start of change” (after 0 seconds), and the execution range of the linked expected production is 6 in one direction (7 including the winning pachinko machine) ), After 8600 ms is determined as a start timing that is one minute later than the start timing of the first pachinko machine (for example, after 7500 ms).

  Then, when the winning control is detected by the waveform control board 425, the effect control program of the receiving pachinko machine 1 determines that the own device is an execution target of the interlocking expected effect, and the interlocking effect notification lamp (for example, frame decoration) Lamp 842 etc.) blinks. In addition, when the winning wave is transmitted by the waveform control board 425, the effect control program of the winning pachinko machine 1 also flashes the interlocking effect notification lamp because the own device is an execution target of the interlocking expected effect. After that, each pachinko machine that is the target of execution of the linked expected production (that is, the winning pachinko machine and the receiving pachinko machine), based on the start timing determined by each pachinko machine, respectively, the fish production as the linked expected production Will be executed sequentially.

  By the way, as described above, in the present embodiment, among the respective pachinko machines that are the target of execution of the linked expected effect (that is, the pachinko machine that blinks the linked effect notification lamp), The fish production is performed from the most pachinko machine located on the most upstream side in the direction of the fish production production to the winning pachinko machine. In other words, this fish production is performed on the pachinko machine located upstream in the direction of the production direction as seen from the winning pachinko machine, and in conjunction with the pachinko machine located on the downstream side in the direction of the production direction as seen from the winning pachinko machine. Even if the effect notification lamp is flashed, the fish school effect is not performed.

  Therefore, the effect control program of the receiving pachinko machine 1 outputs the winning wave of a different number of times depending on the output direction, so that the automatic pachinko machine 1 automatically outputs the winning wave based on the number of winning waves detected by the waveform control board 425. The machine decides whether or not to execute a fish school effect as a linked expected effect. That is, when the primary winning wave and the secondary winning wave are detected within a predetermined interval by the waveform control board 425, the own machine is located upstream in the direction of the effect as viewed from the winning pachinko machine. The expected performance execution flag to be set is set to ON. On the other hand, when only the primary winning wave is detected by the waveform control board 425, the own machine is positioned downstream in the direction of the effect as viewed from the winning pachinko machine, and therefore the expected effect execution flag described later is turned OFF. Set. Then, among the pachinko machines that are subject to the execution of the interlocked expected effects, in the pachinko machines for which the expected effect execution flag is set to ON, the effect control program executes the fish school effects based on the aforementioned effect timing.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 that receives the winning wave (and the winning pachinko machine 1 that transmits the winning wave), the interlocking effect notification lamp flashes if the own pachinko machine is an execution target of the interlocking expected effect. . Furthermore, among the pachinko machines whose interlocking effect notification lamps are blinking, from the endmost pachinko machine located on the most upstream side in the direction of the production direction of the fish school production to the winning pachinko machine, in order based on each production timing A school of fish production is performed. Thereby, so that a plurality of pachinko machines are interlocked, a fish school effect as an interlocking expected effect is integrally realized along a predetermined effect progressing direction.

(About the production timing corresponding to your position)
Here, in more detail, with reference to FIG. 49, the function of acquiring the effect timing at which the interlocked expected effect is executed when each pachinko machine receives the winning wave (particularly in the receiving pachinko machine 1) will be described. . 49 and 50 are diagrams showing examples of the waveform of the winning wave and the waveform of the detected winning wave. Note that the frequency of the winning wave (for example, 40 Kh) shown in FIG. 50 is an example in which the frequency is doubled than the frequency of the winning wave (for example, 20 Kh) shown in FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 49, when the winning wave is detected by the waveform control board 425 in the receiving pachinko machine 1, the effect control program determines the amplitudes W1 to W5 when the winning wave is detected in advance. The amount of attenuation is checked by comparing with the reference amplitude value W0 (intensity information) of the winning wave. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49, when the winning wave is detected, the amplitude W1 of the first detection waveform 9900b, the amplitude W2 of the second detection waveform 990c, the amplitude W3 of the third detection waveform 990d, etc. And the predetermined reference amplitude value W0 (that is, intensity information) of the output waveform 990a of the winning wave is compared to check the amount of attenuation.

  Similarly, as shown in FIG. 50, even when the frequency (cycle) is doubled compared to the winning wave shown in FIG. 49, the amplitude W1 and the second detection of the first detection waveform 990h of the winning wave By comparing the amplitude W2 of the waveform 990i, the amplitude W3 of the third detection waveform 990d, and the predetermined reference amplitude value W0 (that is, intensity information) of the output waveform 990g of the selected wave, the attenuation amount can be checked. That's fine. Thus, any frequency can be adopted as the frequency (cycle) of the winning wave.

  Thereby, in the production control program, the attenuation amount can be specified regardless of the type of the winning wave (primary winning wave and secondary winning wave). Then, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 that has transmitted or received the winning wave, it is determined that the own machine is the execution target of the interlocking expected effect, and the interlocking effect notification lamp (for example, the frame decoration lamp 842) flashes. Is done. And in the pachinko machine (that is, the reception pachinko machine 1 and the winning pachinko machine 1) that are the execution targets of the interlocked expected production, the production timing is determined as follows.

  That is, the presentation control program of the receiving pachinko machine 1 corresponds to the relative self-position seen from the winning pachinko machine based on the attenuation amount of the winning wave amplitude with reference to the attenuation determination table shown in FIG. As described above, an effect timing for displaying a special interlocking image (fish school image), which is a special effect image, is set as the interlocking expected effect. In the present embodiment, such a special interlocking image is exemplified as that the interlocking expectation effect is executed by interlocking with six pachinko machines (not including the winning pachinko machine) constituting the gaming machine train. .

  Specifically, the effect control program of the reception pachinko machine 1 determines the effect timing based on the attenuation amount of the winning wave as follows. First, as shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, when the attenuation amount of the winning wave is 10%, it is very close to the winning pachinko machine and the number of arrangements from the winning pachinko machine is the first one. The production timing is set to 7500 ms to display the sixth special interlocking image. And when the amount of attenuation of the winning wave is about 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, the arrangement is 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th respectively. Because it is eye, stage timing to display special interlocking images at the 5th (after 6400ms), 4th (after 5300ms), 3rd (after 4200ms), 2nd (after 3100ms) and 1st (after 2000ms) Set. Here, for example, when the second special interlocking image is displayed as an example, “after 3100 ms” means that the winning wave output by the winning pachinko machine is detected (in other words, the winning pachinko machine outputs the winning wave) This means that it is 3100 ms later with respect to (just after).

  On the other hand, the presentation control program of the winning pachinko machine 1 is the winning pachinko machine itself, regardless of the winning wave and its attenuation, as described above, so that the special interlocking image should be displayed at the end (seventh). The production timing is set to 8600 ms.

  Here, when the effect control program determines the effect timing in this way, the effect timing is managed by, for example, an effect timing management timer (not shown). This production management timing timer counts up every 2 ms in, for example, interrupt processing. For example, when the production timing is 3100 ms later, for example, the production management timing timer is counted up until the production management timing timer reaches 1550. . That is, in this embodiment, the interval at which each pachinko machine executes the interlocking expected effect is set to 1100 ms. In each pachinko machine, when the production management timing timer reaches its production timing, the production control program starts the fish production as an expected linked production.

  As described above, among the receiving pachinko machines 1 that are subject to the execution of the interlocking expected performance, the fish production is actually performed because of the pachinko machine that has received the primary winning wave and the secondary winning wave (winning pachinko machine). To a pachinko machine located upstream in the direction of production. Therefore, a pachinko machine that has received only the primary winning wave (a pachinko machine located downstream in the direction of the production progression from the winning pachinko machine) does not acquire the above-mentioned production timing, or even if the production timing is obtained, the production timing Is ignored, so the fish production is not executed.

  As described above, the production control program of the receiving pachinko machine 1 and the winning pachinko machine 1 is, for example, the highest so as to correspond to its own position in the gaming machine array arranged between the winning pachinko machine and the end pachinko machine. When the display of the special interlocking image (fish school effect) is started from the end pachinko machine, it is possible to grasp the effect timing at which the own machine should display the special interlocking image. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention can grasp the production timing according to the relative positional relationship between the winning pachinko machine and the most pachinko machine constituting the pachinko machine row.

  In particular, in the winning pachinko machine 1, when performing the fish school production as the linked expected production according to the arrangement order of each pachinko machine from the most pachinko machine to the winning pachinko machine, the fish production in the own machine is the single expected production ( In other words, it can be completed at almost the same timing as the decorative pattern variation mode. That is, it is possible not only to accurately obtain the production timing at which the own aircraft should execute the fish school production, but also to execute the above-mentioned single expected production (that is, the decorative pattern variation mode) at the accurate production timing. it can.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the effect control program of the reception pachinko machine 1 is not only when the expected effect execution flag is “ON” but also when it is “OFF”, until the effect management timing timer becomes 1000, That is, the interlocking effect notification lamp (for example, the frame decoration lamp 842 etc.) blinks for the first 2000 ms. In other words, over this 2000 ms, each pachinko machine in the gaming machine row that is the target of execution of the linked expected production flashes the linked production notification lamp in conjunction with the player and hall visitors in the gaming machine row, It is stated that there is a winning pachinko machine in this gaming machine row. As a result, each player in contact with the blinking of the interlocking effect notification lamp knows that it is derived that the winning lottery is won by the fish school effect in one of the surrounding pachinko machines constituting the gaming machine train. Can be obtained.

(Execution mode of linked expectation production)
As described above, in each pachinko machine 1, an interlocking expected effect (that is, a fish school effect) is sequentially executed in accordance with each effect timing. As a result, in this embodiment, when the most pachinko machine completes the execution of the interlocking expectation effect, the next pachinko machine arranged next to the winning pachinko machine from the end pachinko machine is expected to interlock. The production will start.

  Then, when the pachinko machine located upstream in the direction of progress of the production direction of the linked expectation is completed, the next pachinko machine adjacent to the downstream side of the direction of travel of the pachinko machine starts the linked expected production. In the order of, in the gaming machine line including each pachinko machine 1 from the most end pachinko machine to the winning pachinko machine, the interlocking expected production will move with respect to the vision of the player and hall visitors Appeals to the visual sense of players.

  Here, if the winning pachinko machine is won in its own internal lottery, the control of the production control program will cause the linked expected production that has been executed by other pachinko machines until then at its own production timing. Another linked expectation effect is executed as another effect mode different from the effect mode. Alternatively, the winning pachinko machine may be configured not to execute the expected interlocking effects so far at its own effect timing under the control of the effect control program. In other words, in this embodiment, the different pachinko machines up to the front of the winning pachinko machine and the winning pachinko machines represent different rendering modes. On the other hand, in each pachinko machine from the most advanced pachinko machine to the pachinko machine in front of the winning pachinko machine, execution of linked expected production is performed at its own production timing (timing following the adjacent pachinko machine) under the control of the production control program To do.

  Here, as the “interlocked expected effect”, a visual effect operation that makes full use of the special interlocked images (the first effect image and the second effect image), which are the aforementioned special effect images, can be exemplified. That is, the effect control program can control the display device control board 816 to execute a visual effect operation as the interlocked expected effect. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 810 controls the display device control board 816 to display the special interlocking image on the effect display device 115.

  In addition, as such “interlocking expected effect”, the effect control program controls the frame decoration relay terminal board 240 to output light by the frame decoration lamp 842, or controls the lamp driving board 850. Then, light may be output by various decorative lamps 852 and 853. In addition, the production control program may control the frame decoration relay terminal board 240 to output special sound through the speakers 144 and 341.

  In this embodiment, when the peripheral control board 810 transmits or receives the primary winning wave, the peripheral control board 810 controls the frame decoration relay terminal board 240 in accordance with the instruction of the effect control program, and the interlocked effect notification lamp (for example, for the first 2000 ms) The frame decoration lamp 842) is turned on, turned off, or blinked. The light emission control of the interlocking effect notification lamp has a role of a notice effect of notifying a pachinko machine that can be an execution target of the interlocking expected effect before the fish effect as the interlocking expected effect is actually started. In this way, not only the fact that the linked expected production will be started in any of the pachinko machines that make up the gaming machine train, but also the pachinko machines that can be the target of the linked expected production will be sent to the surrounding players and hall visitors. I can inform you.

  Note that the notice effect is performed at the timing when the winning wave is transmitted or received by the wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b (that is, as soon as the winning wave is transmitted or received). Thereby, a notice effect can be performed almost simultaneously (a slight time lag may occur) in a plurality of gaming machines that transmit or receive the winning wave among a plurality of pachinko machines that constitute the gaming machine train. As a result, it is possible to perform a notice effect simultaneously on a plurality of pachinko machines without performing complicated control.

  In the present embodiment, after the light emission control of the interlocking effect notification lamp as the notice effect for the first 2000 ms is performed, an effect medium such as a school of fish is displayed from the left as the special interlocking image displayed as the interlocking expected effect. An effect image (first effect image) that progresses to the right is prepared, and an effect image (second effect image) that the effect medium progresses from right to left is prepared.

  For example, when it is determined that the winning pachinko machine is located on the right side and the most advanced pachinko machine is located on the left side, the production medium is displayed from the left to the right as a special interlocking image to be displayed. The effect image (first effect image) that progresses to is selected. On the other hand, for example, when it is determined that the winning pachinko machine is located on the left side and the most pachinko machine is located on the right side, the production medium is displayed on the right as an effect video to be displayed. The effect image (second effect image) that progresses to the left is selected.

  In the present embodiment, whether the effect control program of the receiving pachinko machine selects the first effect image or the second effect image is determined based on which of the above-mentioned secondary winning waves is received from the left or right direction. That is, when the winning wave is received from the wave transmission / reception device 188a, since the reception pachinko machine is on the right side of the winning pachinko machine, the second effect image in which the effect medium proceeds from right to left is selected. Further, when the winning wave is received from the wave transmitting / receiving device 188b, the reception pachinko machine is on the left side of the winning pachinko machine, and therefore the first effect image in which the effect medium advances from the left to the right is selected. That is, in the receiving pachinko machine, an effect image in which the effect medium advances toward the direction in which the winning wave is received is selected.

  On the other hand, whether the effect control program of the winning pachinko machine selects the first effect image or the second effect image is determined by whether the above-described secondary winning wave is transmitted from the left or right direction. That is, when the secondary winning wave is transmitted from the wave transmitting / receiving device 188a, the effect progress direction of the interlocking expected effect is the right direction, and therefore the first effect image in which the effect medium advances from the left to the right is selected. Further, when the secondary winning wave is transmitted from the wave transmitting / receiving device 188b, the effect progressing direction of the interlocking expected effect is the left direction, so the second effect image in which the effect medium advances from the right to the left is selected. That is, in the winning pachinko machine, unlike the receiving pachinko machine, an effect image in which the effect medium advances in the opposite direction from the direction in which the secondary winning wave is transmitted is selected.

  As a result, the receiving pachinko machine and the winning pachinko machine only need to specify the direction in which the second winning wave is received, and the optimal medium that the production medium advances in the same direction in all the pachinko machines where the interlocking expected production is executed. An effect image can be selected, and an effect mode in which a plurality of pachinko machines have an appearance interlocked with each other can be realized. The effect video on the winning pachinko machine is different from the effect video on the receiving pachinko machine, and it is derived that the winning is performed by an internal lottery process in the own pachinko machine. Details will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the special interlocking image is described in a specific manner in which the special interlocking image is advanced from at least one direction (that is, from right to left or from left to right). It is also possible to control the production so that it is not limited to. A plurality of fish schools may appear. In the present embodiment, any pachinko machine that is within the range of the gaming machine row that has received the winning wave and is the execution target of the interlocking expected production, and that is performed within the production time of the winning pachinko machine. The starting direction of the school of fish production and the number of school of fish are not limited.

  As described above, when a plurality of fish schools appear, the player's sense of expectation sitting on the loser base is higher than when there is a single fish. In addition, since it is an effect that eventually the school of fish gathers under the selected pachinko machine, the impact on the players and hall visitors in the gaming machine train will be very large.

  In the present embodiment, when the peripheral control board 810 displays the special interlocking image on the effect display device 115 for 1100 ms under the control of the effect control program, there is a time difference of, for example, 800 ms at the timing following the adjacent pachinko machine. A special interlocking image is displayed. In other words, in adjacent pachinko machines, when one pachinko machine displays a special interlocking image for 800 ms, the next adjacent pachinko machine starts displaying the special interlocking image. As a result, in the adjacent pachinko machine, when the image display of the special interlocking image in one pachinko machine is nearing the end, the image display of the special interlocking image in the other pachinko machine is started, and a part of the special interlocking image is displayed. Interlocked expectation effects proceed in a manner that overlaps.

  In other words, in this embodiment, a plurality of pachinko machines do not execute the fish school production as the synchronized expected production, but each independent pachinko machine (except the winning pachinko machine) receives the winning wave. Based on the information of the winning wave, the interlocking expected effect is displayed at the timing of each pachinko machine. Therefore, it looks as if the school of fish production is being performed in conjunction with the game machine line.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention, when the peripheral control board 810 receives an effect command having jackpot winning information from the main control board 710, the waveform control board 425 transmits a winning wave to another pachinko machine. Whether or not to output the winning wave may be determined by lottery. This includes not only the execution of linked expected effects such as a school of fish that each pachinko machine 1 sequentially executes in conjunction with each other, but also the regulation of each linked expected effect so as not to execute the school of fish effects. Because.

  Further, as one aspect of controlling so as not to execute the interlocking expected effect, a pachinko machine that is not playing a game may be controlled so as not to perform the fish school effect even if the winning wave is received. In this way, when there is only one player playing on the game island, when the player's pachinko machine wins a jackpot, the fish production can be performed by one person. The fact that an interlocking expected effect is performed on an amusement island means that at least one of the gaming machines on that amusement island always includes a jackpot, so on a single amusement island where there is only one player, By doing it, you will surely get the feeling and excitement that the jackpot is yourself. However, once you have recognized that you are a big hit, there may be cases where there is not much advantage to performing a fish school for a long time.

  In addition, the pachinko machine that output the winning wave outputs a winning wave indicating that it has won in the internal lottery, but not only the player of this winning pachinko machine but also the players of the surrounding pachinko machines Because it is not possible to know, this winning cannot be recognized immediately.

  In addition, regarding the lighting and flashing of the interlocking effect notification lamp in each pachinko machine, if it is a pachinko machine that is the target of execution of the interlocking expected effect, each pachinko machine in the gaming machine row that has received the winning wave and the winning pachinko machine Linked effect notification lamps may be turned on at the same time, and the pachinko machine located at the end of one of the adjacent row of gaming machines may be linked to the pachinko machine located at the other end. You may light up in order. Moreover, if it is the pachinko machine which becomes the execution object of a joint expectation effect, you may light and blink a joint effect notification lamp at random.

  In each pachinko machine, the interlocking effect notification lamps are lit and flashed at the same time, thereby giving a strong light impact to the sight of the players in the gaming machine train and the hall visitors. At the same time, it is possible to overlook that any one of the gaming machine trains whose interlocking effect notification lamps are blinking is the winning pachinko machine. In addition, each player in the row of gaming machines recognizes that any one of the row of gaming machines is a winning pachinko machine, and says "Maybe his table may have been won" Expectation. Since it is certain that one of the gaming machine rows in which the interlocking effect notification lamp blinks will win the jackpot, the expectation of the player of each pachinko machine in the gaming machine row is higher than the normal reach production. Needless to say, it will be much higher.

  By the way, pachinko is basically something that can be enjoyed alone, so even if someone sits next to you, it is not a pleasure to observe the gaming state of the next pachinko machine. Therefore, even if the next base becomes a big hit, it is an implicit understanding that even if you glance at the gaming state, it is legal to look into it seriously. However, the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment performs not only the pachinko machine won in the jackpot lottery as described above, but also the pachinko machine (that is, the lost pachinko machine) that has received the winning wave together. Therefore, if the interlocking effect notification lamps are turned on all at once, you can look into the adjacent pachinko machine, and all the pachinko machines with the interlocking effect notification lamps lit, until your fish production, which will be described later, is finished. You can expect to win your own machine while watching the pachinko machines in the adjacent row of gaming machines.

  Then, all pachinko machine players and hall visitors whose interlocking effect notification lamps are lit are lit up at the same time as the interlocking effect notification lamps are turned on all at once, and at the same time, they are nailed to the fish productions displayed on the adjacent pachinko machines. Then, I will follow the end of the school of fish with my eyes. Each player knows that the school of fish is a win if he comes to himself, so that he can feel a sense of unity in the sense of unity by chasing the school of fish while eagerly hoping that the school will come to him .

  Also, if your pachinko machine has won the jackpot lottery internally, when a school of fish appears on your pachinko machine during the linked expectation production (fish production), it will be different from the lost pachinko machine In order to carry out the mode, the player sitting in the losing pachinko machine has the expectation that the school of fish should “show the other mode instead of passing through the pachinko machine if possible”. In order to raise this expectation, each time the player appears on each pachinko machine, the player may be allowed to participate in the fish school production by causing the player to press a button.

  Usually, when a monotonous gaming state continues for a long time, the player may feel sleepy. However, when the interlocking effect notification lamp of the pachinko machine in the present embodiment is lit, the area around the lit gaming machine line is suddenly brightened. This brightness is high enough to allow the player to feel the brightness even if they are sitting down, so even if they feel a little sleepy, their brightness disappears. Furthermore, the interest that has been reduced by sleepiness can be recovered.

  Note that the special interlocking image displayed at the time of the expected interlocking effect does not hinder the visual recognition of the display of a predetermined effect image (for example, a decorative design, a reach effect, or a background effect) displayed on the effect display device 115. Preferably it is displayed. That is, since the special interlocking image is displayed together with the predetermined effect image, for example, it is interesting to infer from the aspect of the effect image when the special interlocking image is displayed whether or not the own device is a hit stand. Can occur.

  In this way, a reduction in interest can be further suppressed by the synergistic effect of both the effect images such as the display of the special interlocking image and the display of the predetermined effect image. In addition, by displaying the special interlocking image on the effect display device 115, it is possible to perform not only a monotonous effect such as a lamp but also a variety of effects. Furthermore, since the special interlocking image and the predetermined effect image are displayed together, even if the special interlocking image is displayed on a plurality of pachinko machines, a new player is prevented from participating in the game during that time. In the same way as before, you can enjoy the game with a single pachinko machine. This also eliminates the concern that the operating rate will decrease.

  Moreover, even if the pachinko machine 1 receives the primary winning wave or / and the secondary winning wave, the primary winning wave or / and the secondary winning wave is determined as to whether to perform the notice effect or / and the linked expected effect. It is left to the independence of the pachinko machine that received the. In other words, even if the winning pachinko machine in the internal lottery process emits the primary winning wave and / or the secondary winning wave, it forces the other pachinko machine to give a notice effect or / and a linked expected effect. It is not a thing. By sharing the primary winning wave or / and the secondary winning wave released from the selected pachinko machine in the internal lottery process with a plurality of pachinko machines, only a shared effect such as a linked expected effect is performed. In other words, even if each pachinko machine receives the primary winning wave or / and the secondary winning wave, it may be determined each time whether to perform the notice effect or / and the interlocking expected effect. Thus, for example, when a primary winning wave or / and a secondary winning wave is received, when a predetermined effect image based on the fact that the result of the internal lottery process in the player is winning is displayed. Thus, it is possible to continue displaying a predetermined effect image based on the winning without displaying the special interlocking image.

(About the features of the notice effect)
Here, the characteristic regarding the light emission control of the interlocking effect notification lamp (here, the frame decoration lamp 842) as the notice effect will be described in more detail.

  First, the “notice effect” is an aspect that can appeal to a third party including at least players of other pachinko machines that constitute the gaming machine line that the notice effect is actually being performed, ie, appeal. By being performed in a manner that can be performed, it has a function that suggests the possibility of performing the interlocking expectation effect. In other words, the fact that the result of the internal lottery process in any one of the plurality of pachinko machines constituting the gaming machine train is a win, the players of other gaming machines constituting the gaming machine train are It is an effect that can appeal to at least third parties.

  As an aspect that can be appealed, for example, when the notice effect is performed by the light emitting means, an aspect in which light having directivity toward a third party is emitted. Further, in the case where the notice effect is performed by the sound generation means, a mode in which directional sound effects (musical sound, voice, etc.) directed to a third party are output is exemplified. However, such light emitting means and sounding means do not necessarily have directivity, and it is only necessary to be able to appeal that light or sound is emitted to a third party by diffusion. Note that this notice effect is preferably appealed to a third party by changing to a specific mode such as lighting or flashing by the light emitting means. Thereby, it becomes possible to let a third party know that the interlocking expected effect is executed by a plurality of pachinko machines constituting the gaming machine train. In addition, since the announcement effect is performed by a plurality of pachinko machines, the effect is great.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the case where the frame decoration lamp 842 is employ | adopted as a light emission means which performs a notice effect is illustrated. Here, in the pachinko machine 1, the effect display device 115 is provided on the rear side of the game area plate 81, while the frame decoration lamp 842 is provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. The predetermined effect image (decoration pattern, reach effect, etc.) displayed on the effect display device 115 is sufficient if the player can see it, and does not need to be visible to a third party. On the other hand, since the announcement effect performed by the frame decoration lamp 842 needs to appeal to a third party, it is provided on the front surface of the door frame 5 where it is easy to appeal to a third party that light has been emitted in a specific manner. It was. By doing in this way, the frame decoration lamp 842 is not obstructed by various parts provided in the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the game area 20, and can appeal to a third party by a notice effect. it can.

  Further, the effect display device 115 is provided inside the gaming window 101, whereas the frame decoration lamp 842 is provided outside the gaming window 101. Specifically, the effect display device 115 is provided so as to overlap the game area 20 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, while the frame decoration lamp 842 is the game area when viewed from the front when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. 20 so as not to overlap.

  This is because the predetermined effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 is related to the result of the internal lottery process, so that the player of the pachinko machine 1 can visually recognize the fired game ball. This is so that a predetermined effect image can be watched. In addition, in the side view of the pachinko machine 1 viewed from the side, it is provided on the rear side of the game area plate 81 as described above.

  On the other hand, since the notice effect performed by the frame decoration lamp 842 is performed in a manner appealing to a third party, it is not necessary to watch like the predetermined effect image, but rather the display without blocking the display of the predetermined effect image. In order to appeal the presentation to a third party, it is preferable to be provided outside the gaming window 101. However, not all of the frame decoration lamps 842 are provided outside the gaming window 101, and as long as the display of the predetermined effect image is not blocked, the gaming window 101 is slightly opened from the outside of the gaming window 101. You may straddle the inside.

  Further, the frame decoration lamp 842 is disposed so as to protrude (project) from the door frame 5 to the front side (that is, the player side) (see FIG. 2 and the like). Thereby, when the notice effect is performed in a mode in which the frame decoration lamp 842 emits light, the notice effect can be further appealed to a third party.

  By the way, the frame decoration lamp 842 is not controlled to emit light only at the time of the announcement effect, but appropriately controlled to emit light according to the progress of the game. That is, when the specific condition is satisfied, an effect that can make the player interested in a predetermined effect image related to the result of the internal lottery process in the pachinko machine 1 is also performed. The effect that can attract the player's interest is an effect that excites the expectation (that is, the expectation of winning) that an image for deriving “big hit” is displayed on the effect display device 115.

  For example, in the effect display device 115, a so-called step-up effect is generally performed in which the expectation to win is gradually improved. At this time, the light emission effect at the frame decoration lamp 842 is also stepped up, Combined with the effect image on the effect display device 115, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the result of the internal lottery process is a hit. Here, the specific condition is satisfied, for example, when the internal lottery is won or when the reach effect is displayed as a predetermined effect image although the internal lottery is not won.

  As described above, the frame decoration lamp 842 performs the light emission effect related to the lottery result of the own device, while the above-described notice effect is performed when the own device transmits or receives the winning wave. Here, even if an effect that can give the player a sense of expectation is performed on the effect display device 115, and the frame decoration lamp 842 is controlled to emit light accordingly, the lottery result is not necessarily a hit (that is, In other words, it does not give a notice that it is 100%, but includes a so-called gasse that may win.) On the other hand, when the winning wave is transmitted or received and the frame decoration lamp 842 is controlled to emit light accordingly (that is, when the notice effect is performed), the gaming machine train is configured as described above. The result of the lottery will be a win for any pachinko machine.

  As described above, the functional positioning of the frame decoration lamp 842 differs between the case where the light emission effect related to the lottery result of the own device is performed and the case where the above-described notice effect is performed. Therefore, when the notice effect is performed, it is preferable that the notice effect is performed in a mode clearly different from the light emission effect related to the lottery result of the own device so that the third party can be appealed to the notice effect. For example, when the frame decoration lamp 842 has a plurality of light emitting elements capable of full color light emission, for example, an effect that a part of the light emitting elements emits light in red is always performed. The effect of emitting light in red is performed, and in the case of performing the notice effect, the effect that all or part of the light emitting elements emit light in full color is performed.

  In this embodiment, an inaudible sound wave (that is, a winning wave) that is difficult for a player to know is output from the wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b, but separately from the winning wave, the game of the pachinko machine An audible sound wave having a frequency that can be obtained not only by the person but also by a third party may be output from the wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b or the speakers 144 and 341. For example, by outputting an audible sound wave (notification sound wave) that can be known not only by the player of the pachinko machine but also by a third party at almost the same timing as the notice effect is performed, the player of the pachinko machine And the attention of the third party can be attracted, and the possibility that the notice effect on the frame decoration lamp 842 is missed is reduced. Also, according to the result of the internal lottery process (for example, winning the jackpot), an audible sound wave (production sound wave) is output in a manner that can be known by the player of the pachinko machine, Bless players.

(About overlapping control of linked expectation production)
By the way, after winning wave is output from one pachinko machine 1, when winning the fish school effect as the linked expected effect among other pachinko machines 1 that have received the winning wave, The winning wave is also output from the other pachinko machine 1. If it does so, the pachinko machine 1 which overlaps and receives the winning wave each output from the some pachinko machine 1 may arise. In addition, even when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 win the internal lottery at almost the same timing, a pachinko machine 1 that receives a plurality of winning waves in duplicate can be generated. In such a case, in the pachinko machine 1 that has received a plurality of winning waves in duplicate, the fish effects are displayed in an overlapping manner, so there is a risk that the display control becomes complicated or a plurality of fish effects are mixed and difficult to see. .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 that has received the winning wave, if the winning is performed by an internal lottery before performing only the fish production based on the winning wave, the lottery result is obtained by the fish production even though it is actually won. There may be a problem that a loss is derived.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is preferable to perform the following control in order to avoid the occurrence of overlapping of the fish school effects as such interlocking expected effects.

  First, the presentation control program of the pachinko machine 1 receives the one winning wave from the outside, receives the other winning wave before the fish production based on the winning wave is executed, and receives it later Discard (invalidate) the winning wave. Thereby, even when the pachinko machine 1 receives a plurality of winning waves at the same or approximate timing, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the fish school effects are duplicated.

  Then, the effect control program of the pachinko machine 1 receives the winning wave from the outside, and executes the fish school effect without performing the output of the winning wave when the own machine is won before the execution of the fish school effect. In other words, this effect control program uses the wave receiving and receiving device from the time when the winning wave is detected by the wave receiving and receiving devices 188a and 188b to the time when the fish production based on the winning wave is executed even if it is won by internal lottery. The winning wave output processing from 188a and 188b is invalidated. Thereby, it is possible to execute the fish school effect on the winning pachinko machine 1 while avoiding the overlap of the fish school effect.

  In addition, the presentation control program of the pachinko machine 1 receives the winning wave from the outside and does not output the winning wave when the own machine is won before executing the fish school effect. If the change has not ended, it will switch to the school of fish production won by itself. In other words, as will be described later, this effect control program includes a special interlocking image (for example, a lost fish school effect) that implies that another game machine has been won when another game machine is won, and its own game machine. Can be executed with a special notification image for winning notification (for example, a winning fish school effect) implying that the game machine has been won (for details of the special notification image for winning notification will be described later) To do). And, when the winning wave is detected by the wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b, the losing fish school effect is always executed, while the fish school effect is executed even when the winning wave is detected by the wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b. When the self-pachinko machine 1 is won by the internal lottery, the winning fish school effect is executed instead of the lost fish school effect. Thereby, the discrepancy between the lottery result in the pachinko machine 1 and the derived contents of the lottery result by the fish school effect can be avoided.

[Control processing on main control board]
Next, various control processes executed on the main board 700 (mainly the main control board 710) according to the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Main system processing)
First, a description will be given based on FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of main system processing executed by the CPU 711 (both see FIG. 41) mounted on the main control board 710 of the main board 700.

  As shown in FIG. 51, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 711 (see FIG. 41) executes power-on processing (step S10). In this power-on process, first, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM 713 (see FIG. 41) is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). That is, the RAM 713 (data memory) of this embodiment has a backup area in which various control data are backed up by constantly supplying power. When the power supply is stopped, the pachinko machine 1 performs a process of temporarily saving various control data stored in the processing area of the RAM 713 to the backup area, and the temporarily saved data when the power is restored. Is read out to the processing area of the RAM 713, so that a game with continuity can be executed from the time of power-off.

  Therefore, in this power-on process (step S10), if the backup data (data in the backup area) is normal, the process of returning to the power supply stop state according to the backup data stored in the RAM 713 (power recovery) Time processing). On the other hand, if the backup data is abnormal, the backup data stored in the RAM 713 is deleted. After that, various control data necessary for the progress of the game, such as control data indicating the current gaming state, is written in the processing area of the RAM 713 with respective initial parameters (initialization processing). Also, when the power is turned on for the first time after commercialization, various control data necessary for game progress are written with respective initial parameters.

  However, in this power-on process (step S10), it is also determined whether or not the RAM erase switch that instructs to erase the backup data stored in the RAM 713 is on. That is, even when this RAM erase switch is on, the backup data stored in the RAM 713 is erased. At the same time, various control data necessary for the progress of the game, such as control data indicating the current game state, is written in the processing area of the RAM 713 with respective initial parameters (initialization process).

  Further, in the power-on process (step S10), a power-on command indicating that the main control board 710 (see FIG. 41) is activated when such an initialization process is executed is sent to the peripheral control board 810 (FIG. 41). The process of setting to a state where transmission is possible is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 810 that the main control board 710 has been activated. In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the amusement store is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM 713, and the power supply is started when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started again. Processing at the time of execution is executed.

  When the power-on process (step S10) ends, the CPU 711 starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop process, the CPU 711 first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S20). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board 395 (see FIG. 41). That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, after the power supply voltage supplied to the pachinko machine 1 from an external power supply is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply board 395, Power is supplied to each device. Then, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board 395 is equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, the power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 395 to the main control board 710 is stopped. Is sent. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the CPU 711 mounted on the main control board 710 in step S20, a process at the time of power failure occurrence is executed (step S40).

  This process at the time of power interruption occurs when the power supply voltage (24V in the present embodiment) supplied to the power supply board 395 is restored (hereinafter referred to as “power recovery”) after the power failure. This is a process of temporarily saving data to the backup area of the RAM 713 in order to start from the state of power failure. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the processing at the time of power-off occurrence is not an interrupt processing, but a branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  If the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S20 (NO in step S20), that is, if the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the non-winning random number update for updating the random number used in the game Processing is performed (step S30). Note that the random numbers updated in the non-winning random number update process will be described later.

(Power failure occurrence processing)
Next, based on FIG. 52, the power interruption generation process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when a power-off occurs. As described above, the power interruption occurrence process (step S40) is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main system process (YES in step S20). First, the CPU 711 performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S42). Then, the checksum in the processing area of the RAM 713 is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored in the backup area of the RAM 713 (step S44). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM 713 before the power failure are properly maintained at the time of power recovery.

  Next, the CPU 711 sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 713 (step S46). When the above processing is completed, the CPU 711 prohibits access to the RAM 713 (step S48) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to an extremely short power failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”) and the process at the time of power interruption occurs, the power supply voltage is not actually stopped. Therefore, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such adverse effects, the CPU 711 of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed, but is not updated when the process when the power is cut off is entered. As a result, a power interruption occurrence process is entered due to a momentary power failure, and even after entering the infinite loop of FIG.

  Instead of the backup area of the RAM 713, a rewritable nonvolatile memory (EEPROM or the like) may be provided. In this case, there is a merit that a constant power supply is not required to back up data.

  Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 713 may be a backup area in which data is backed up by constantly supplying power. In this case, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the specific area of the RAM 713 to another area when the power is shut off. In addition, since it is not necessary to read the saved data to the processing area when the power is restored, the load required for these processes is reduced.

(Timer interrupt processing)
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the CPU 711 mounted on the main control board 710 of the main board 700 during execution of the main system process. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 711 executes the process from step S60 to step S270 after executing the register standby process (step S50).

  In the sensor monitoring process of step S60, a process of monitoring detection signals of the various sensors described above (gate sensor 760, upper starter sensor 780, lower starter sensor 784, opening / closing device count sensor 776, etc.) is executed.

  In the winning random number update process of step S70, a process of updating a random number used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the winning random number update process is different from the random number updated in the non-winning random number update process. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the winning random number updating process may be updated in the non-winning random number updating process.

  In the payout control process in step S80, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control board 720 based on the signal detected in the sensor monitoring process (step S60).

  In the normal symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process in step S90, the control process related to the normal symbol display 82 is executed based on the signal detected from the gate sensor 760 in the sensor monitoring process (step S60). The process for performing opening / closing control of the movable piece 606 is executed.

  In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process of step S100, a series of processing from the start of variation of the special symbol to the start of the winning game is executed, and opening / closing control of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 as the special electric accessory is performed. Perform the process to do.

  In the output data setting process of step S260, a process of generating a command to be transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810 is executed based on information determined in the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S100). .

  In the command transmission process of step S270, a process of transmitting the command set in the output data setting process (step S260) to the peripheral control board 810 is performed. When the processing from step S60 to step S270 is executed, the register return processing (step S280) is executed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the CPU 711 in the above-described non-winning random number update processing (step S30) and winning random number update processing (step S70) will be described.

  In the present embodiment, various random numbers used in the game include a random number for determination of success / failure, a random number for design, a random number for determination of reach, a variation pattern random number, a random number for determination of success / failure of normal design, and the like.

  The success / failure determination random number is a success / failure determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game. The symbol random number is a random number used to determine the type of jackpot (probability jackpot or normal jackpot) when it is determined that a jackpot game will be generated. The reach determination random number is a random number used for determining whether or not to make reach variation when it is determined that the jackpot is not won (that is, lost) in the determination of success or failure. The variation pattern random number is a random number used for determining a variation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 84. The normal symbol determination random number is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the pair of movable pieces 606 to be in an open state.

  It should be noted that the variation pattern of the decorative design that is display-controlled by the effect display device 115 may be determined by a variation pattern random number, and is mounted on the CPU 811 or the display device control board 816 mounted on the peripheral control board 810 of the peripheral board 800. It may be determined by the CPU 832 (see FIG. 42). The variation pattern random number is not essential, and the variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number.

  Of these random numbers, in the winning random number update process, the random number for determining whether or not to win the jackpot game, the design random number, and whether or not to control the pair of movable pieces 606 in an open state in which a game ball can be easily received. The random number for determination per symbol is updated. Here, the random numbers used for determining whether or not the big hit game is generated and whether or not the pair of movable pieces 606 are controlled to be opened are updated every 4 ms as a fixed timing. By doing this, the probability (probability determined to generate a jackpot game, probability determined to control the pair of movable pieces 606 to be opened) in a predetermined period in each random number is made constant (that is, aiming) And the like can be prevented from being biased, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

  On the other hand, in the non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number and the variation pattern random number irrespective of the occurrence of the winning game and the display result of the normal symbol are updated. Note that the random numbers updated on the main control board 710 are not limited to those described above. In the non-winning random number update process, when the counter for updating the random number for determining whether or not the circuit has made one round, the determination is made to start counting next. The initial value determination random number or the like for determining the initial value of the random number is also updated.

(Special symbol / Special electric accessory control processing)
Next, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S100).

  In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process, first, a start opening winning process (step S110) is performed. Specifically, as will be described later, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been received in the upper start opening 600 or the lower start opening 604, and a series of processing is performed based on this. Once the start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process flag is checked (steps S120 to S230), and the process corresponding to the process flag is performed.

  When the start opening winning process (step S110) is finished, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is 0 (step S120). If the process flag is 0 (YES in step S120), the fluctuation start process (step S130). ). In the variation start process (step S130), settings for starting the variation display of the special symbol are performed. As will be described in detail later, it is determined whether or not to start the big hit game, and the processing flag is updated to “1”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S120 (NO in step S120), the process proceeds to step S140.

  In step S140, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). If the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 84 and the decoration symbol displayed on the effect display device 115 is determined, and the variation time (special In the symbol display 84, the time from the start of special symbol variation display to the stop display) is set in the timer, and the processing flag is updated to "2". On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S140 (NO in step S140), the process proceeds to step S170.

  In step S170, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). If the processing flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the changing process (step S180) is executed. In the changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and the changing display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 84 is stopped based on the time-out. At this time, the process selection flag is updated to “3” if it is determined to be a big hit in the change start process (step S130), and the process selection flag is set to “0” if it is not determined to be a big hit. Update. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S170 (NO in step S170), the process proceeds to step S190.

  In step S190, it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S190). If the process flag is 3 (YES in step S190), a big hit game start process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start process, the number of rounds for controlling the opening / closing operation of the jackpot game opening / closing device 500, the opening time and the number of game balls to be awarded are set, and the processing flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S210). If the processing flag is 4 (YES in step S210), a special electric utility big hit control process (step S220) is executed. In the special electric utility jackpot control process, the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is controlled based on the number of rounds set in the jackpot gaming start process (step S200), the opening time, and the number of game balls to be won. When the game is over, it is determined whether or not to operate the probability variation function and a process of updating the processing flag to “0” is performed.

  When any of the various processes from step S130 to step S220 is executed, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process is terminated.

(Start-up winning process)
Next, the start opening winning process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the start opening winning process.

  When it is determined in step S1101 that a game ball has won a prize at the upper start opening 600 or the lower start opening 604, various data (a random determination number for determination, a random number for determination, a random number for special determination, and a special symbol type acquired by the special symbol determination random number acquisition means 902). ) To get. Then, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the special symbol hold counter 903 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1102).

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the counter value of special symbol hold counter 903 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1102), CPU 711 performs hold storage processing (step S1103), and then proceeds to step S1104. In the holding storage process, various data (random determination random number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning a game ball in the upper starting slot 600 or the lower starting slot 604 are stored in the random number determining random storage area 5131 In addition, it is a process of adding 1 to the counter value of the special symbol hold counter 903. In addition, the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure has a random number storage area for determination of success / failure, a design random number storage area, and a special symbol type storage area, and a game ball has won a prize at the upper start opening 600 or the lower start opening 604. The various data acquired by is stored in the respective storage areas.

  In step S1102, if the counter value of the special symbol hold counter 903 is the upper limit value when the game ball wins the upper start port 600 or the lower start port 604, the various data acquired in step S1101 are discarded.

  When it is determined that a game ball has won the upper start port 600 or the lower start port 604, it is not always necessary to acquire various data (randomness number for determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) in step S1101. What is necessary is just to perform between step S1101-step S1103. For example, various data may be acquired after determining that the counter value of the special symbol reservation counter 903 is less than the upper limit value in step S1102 without acquiring various data in step S1101, or the storage in step S1103 You may make it acquire by a process.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the winning process (step S1101 to step S1103) for the upper start port 600 or the lower start port 604 is executed.

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the upper start opening 600 or the lower start opening 604, the lottery process is performed by the special symbol lottery means 900, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, special symbol lottery means may be provided corresponding to the upper start port 600 and the lower start port 604 (that is, the first special symbol lottery means corresponding to the upper start port and the second corresponding to the lower start port. Special symbol lottery means may be provided). In this case, the jackpot winning probability when the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means is performed may be different from the jackpot winning probability when the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means is performed. . In addition, there is a difference in the benefits given to the player when winning the jackpot in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means and when winning the jackpot in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means. May be. For example, when the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means is performed, the probability that the jackpot game is executed is set to be relatively high, while the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means is performed. Corresponds to the case where the probability that the jackpot game is executed is set relatively low.

(Variation start processing)
Next, the variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change start process.

  In the variation start process (step S130) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the CPU 711 first sets the number of random numbers (starting storage number) stored in the random number storage area 5131 for validity determination to be zero. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1301). If the starting storage number stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of validity is 0, the counter value of the special symbol hold counter 903 is 0.

  If the starting storage number is not 0 (NO in step S1301), a shift process of the random number storage area 5131 for determination of validity is performed (step S1302). This shift process is a process of shifting the order in which the determination of whether or not the random number acquired based on the winning of the game ball at the upper start opening 600 or the lower start opening 604 is performed is performed. That is, whether or not the special symbol is successful is determined in the order in which the game balls are won in the upper start opening 600 or the lower start opening 604, and therefore the order is shifted as the change starts. The random number acquired earliest among the random numbers acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the upper start port 600 or the lower start port 604 is transferred to the processing area 5132. If the start memory number is 0 in step S1301 (YES in step S1301), the variation start process is terminated.

  After performing the shift process in step S1302, the CPU 711 sets the special symbol flag to ON (step S1304), decrements the counter value of the special symbol hold counter 903 by 1 (step S1305), and proceeds to step S1308.

  In step S1308, it is determined whether or not the gaming state in which the probability changing function is operating (step S1308). Here, if the gaming state is that the probability variation function is operating (YES in step S1308), the probability variation special figure determination table 908 is selected (step S1309). On the other hand, if the probability variation function is not activated in step S1308 (NO in step S1308), the normal special figure determination table 906 is selected (step S1310).

  Then, the determination is made based on the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the determination random number stored in the processing area 5132 (step S1311). Note that the jackpot determination in step S1311 is performed by the special symbol success / failure determination means 904.

  If it is determined in step S1311 that the game is a big hit (YES in step S1311), the type of jackpot is determined based on the acquired symbol random number (step S1312). Thereafter, the flag corresponding to the jackpot type (that is, the above-described winning flag) is turned ON (step S1313). Specifically, the probability variation jackpot flag is turned ON if it is a probability jackpot, and the normal jackpot flag is turned ON if it is a normal jackpot. Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “1” (step S1316), and the variation start process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, after the shift process is performed in step S1302, whether or not the determination is correct is made based on the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the determination random number stored in the processing area 5132. Although it is performed (step S1311), it is not limited to this. For example, it may be determined whether or not the determination is successful based on the determination table and the random number stored first in the determination random number storage area 5131, and the shift process may be performed. At this time, the validity determination random number stored in the validity determination random number storage area 5131 can be referred to only when the change starts.

(Variation pattern setting process)
Next, the variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process (step S150).

  The variation pattern setting process is a process of setting a variation pattern according to the determination result. In this process, first, it is determined whether or not any one of a plurality of types of jackpot is ON (step S1510). If the jackpot flag is in the ON state (YES in step S1510), the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is set (step S1520). Specifically, if the probability variation jackpot flag is ON, the variation pattern corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is set, and if the normal jackpot flag is ON, the variation pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1560, the variation time value is set in the timer, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S1570), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  If none of the jackpot flags is in the ON state in step S1510 (NO in step S1510), it is determined that the winning / failing determination result is a loss that is not won in the jackpot, and a variation pattern corresponding to the loss is set (step S1550). In step S1560, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S1570), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  In addition, based on the variation pattern set in this variation pattern setting process, it is displayed by the lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs on the special symbol display 84.

(Processing during change)
Next, the changing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process. In the changing process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S1801). Here, if the special symbol display 84 is changing, it is determined that it is changing. If the special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1801), the changing process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1801 that the special symbol is changing (YES in step S1801), the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the variable time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time set in the timer has elapsed in the variation pattern setting process. If the variation time has not elapsed, the process waits until the variation time has elapsed (NO in step S1802). When the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S1802), the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (step S1803). That is, the special symbol display 84 derives and displays the lottery result of the special symbol lottery means 900.

  When the variation of the special symbol is stopped (step S1803), it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags is ON (step S1804). That is, as a result of the fact that the current fluctuation is stopped and the lottery result is derived, it is determined whether or not any jackpot game is started. If any of the jackpot flags is in the ON state (YES in step S1804), the processing flag is updated to “3” (step S1805), and the changing process is terminated. If none of the jackpot flags is in the ON state (NO in step S1804), the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S1808), and the changing process is terminated.

(Big hit game start processing)
Next, the jackpot game start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the jackpot game start process. In this jackpot game start process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation (step S2001). As described above, when the jackpot game is being executed, the probability variation function does not operate. Therefore, when the probability variation function is activated, the probability variation function is stopped (step S2002), and the process proceeds to step S2003. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that the probability variation function is not operating (NO in step S2001), step S2002 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the open extension function is in operation. As described above, since the opening extension function does not operate when the jackpot game is being executed, if the opening extension function is operating, the operation of the opening extension function is stopped (step S2004), and the process proceeds to step S2005. move on. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2003 that the open extension function is not activated (NO in step S2003), step S2004 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2006.

  In step S2006, the number of rounds in the jackpot game (for example, 15 rounds), the maximum opening time (for example, 30 seconds) of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 per round, and the maximum number of winnings (for example, nine balls) are set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2008, the processing flag is updated to “5”, and the jackpot game start processing is ended.

(Special electric utility jackpot control process)
Next, based on FIG. 60, the special electric utility jackpot control process will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process. In the special electric utility jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game opening / closing device 500 is being opened (step S2401). If jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is open (YES in step S2401), it is determined whether or not a preset maximum opening time of jackpot gaming switching device 500 has passed (step S2402). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in step S2006 has elapsed. If it is determined that the maximum opening time of the jackpot gaming switch 500 has elapsed (YES in step S2402), the jackpot gaming switch 500 is closed (step S2404), and the process proceeds to step S2405.

  If the opening time of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 has not elapsed in step S2402 (NO in step S2402), it is determined whether or not the gaming ball of the maximum winning number set in advance has been received by the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500. (Step S2403). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the count value by the opening / closing device count sensor 776 has reached the maximum number of winnings set in step S2006. If it is determined that the maximum winning number of game balls has been received by the jackpot gaming switch 500 (YES in step S2403), the process proceeds to step S2404, and the jackpot gaming switch 500 is closed. On the other hand, if the maximum winning game ball is not received in the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500, the process returns to step S2402.

  In step S2405, it is determined whether a preset number of rounds has been reached (step S2405). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds set in step S2006 has been reached. If the number of rounds set in advance is reached (YES in step S2405), the process proceeds to step S2407, and the jackpot flag is turned OFF. On the other hand, if the preset round number has not been reached (NO in step S2405), the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is released (step S2406), and the process returns to step S2402.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is not open (NO in step S2401), the process proceeds to step S2405.

  After turning off the jackpot flag in step S2407, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function should be activated (step S2408). If the probability variation function is to be activated, the probability variation function is activated (step S2410) and further opened. After performing the operation process of the extension function (step S2411), the special electric accessory big hit control process is terminated. Specifically, if the jackpot flag turned OFF in step S2407 is a probability change jackpot flag, the probability changing function and the opening extension function are activated. In other words, if the jackpot game that has been played so far is a jackpot game based on winning the probability change jackpot, the probability change function and the open extension function are activated. As a result, the game state after the jackpot game is executed as the winning winning jackpot is controlled to a probability fluctuation state that is easier to win the jackpot than the normal state, and the open extension function until the next jackpot is won Will enter a special gaming state

  On the other hand, if the jackpot flag turned OFF in step S2407 is a normal jackpot flag (NO in step S2408), only the opening extension function operation process is performed in step S2413 without operating the probability changing function. Then, after setting the number of operations (for example, 100 times) of the opening extension function (step S2414), the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S2415), and the special feature jackpot control process is terminated. As a result, the game state after the jackpot game is executed with the normal jackpot winning is the same as the normal state with the probability of winning the jackpot without operating the probability changing function, but a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) Only the advantageous gaming state (the so-called short-time gaming state) in which the opening extension function is activated is controlled. Note that after the predetermined number of times of the release extension function is activated, the gaming state becomes a normal gaming state in which neither the opening extension function nor the probability changing function is activated.

[About the control process related to interlocking expected effects]
Next, among the various control processes executed on the peripheral board 800 (mainly the peripheral control board 810) of the pachinko machine 1, the above-described control process related to the interlocked expected effect will be described with reference to FIGS. . FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the winning wave output reservation process. FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of a winning wave output execution process. FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the winning wave detection process. FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of effect timing determination processing. FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of effect video display processing.

  In addition, each process demonstrated below is a process included in the interruption process which an effect control program performs by control of CPU811 of the peripheral control board 810 every 2 ms, for example.

(Winning wave output reservation processing)
First, the winning wave output reservation process will be described with reference to FIG. This winning wave output reservation process is a process of making a reservation for outputting a winning wave having a predetermined amplitude when winning in the big hit lottery. In the present embodiment, description will be made on the assumption that, for example, seven pachinko machines 1 in a row of gaming machines, including the winning pachinko machine, execute the interlocking expected effect.

  First, the effect control program determines whether or not the winning information included in the effect command received by the peripheral control board 810 from the main control board 710 is “winning (big hit)” (step S3001), and has not won. In this case, the winning wave output reservation process is terminated, whereas if the winning wave is won, the effect direction determining process for determining the effect direction is executed (step S3002).

  In the effect direction determination process in step S3002, the effect control program refers to the effect progress direction selection table (see FIG. 45) described above, and is linked based on a random value (random value for effect progress direction) acquired at random. Determine the direction of the expected performance. That is, the effect control program selects the direction in which the special interlocking image displayed on the effect display device 115 as the interlocking expected effect is to proceed based on the random value for the effect progress direction acquired at random.

  Specifically, the effect control program sets the effect advance direction flag to “0”, for example, when the effect advance direction random number is 0 to 39. When the effect progress direction flag is “0”, it means that the winning wave is not output and the expected interlocking effect is not executed (the special interlocking image is not displayed). The effect control program sets the effect progress direction flag to “1”, for example, when the effect progress direction random number is 40 to 69, and advances the special interlocking image from the left direction to the right direction. The effect control program sets the effect progress direction flag to “2” and advances the special interlocking image from the right direction to the left direction, for example, when the random number value for the effect progress direction is 70 to 99.

  Next, the effect control program determines the distribution of the direction in which the winning wave is to be output as the execution range of the interlocked expected effect (step S3003). In the output direction distribution process of S3003, the production control program generates an output distribution random value (for example, 0 to 99) that is counted every 2 ms, for example, and this output distribution is generated at a timing at which the winning wave is to be output, for example. Get a random number for minutes. At the same time, the effect control program refers to the aforementioned output direction distribution table (see FIG. 46), and determines the direction in which the winning wave is to be output according to the randomly obtained output distribution random value. This output direction distribution table is a table that includes information for distributing the output direction of the winning wave to be output for each randomly obtained output distribution random value (corresponding to the random value shown in the figure). It is a table containing the information for performing the lottery for determining the number of the pachinko machines which should make a wave reach.

  Specifically, for example, when the production control program executes an interlocking expected production with 7 units including its own pachinko machine, if the output distribution random value is 0 to 29, the left side Three pachinko machines, one's own pachinko machine, and the right three pachinko machines are set to be linked (that is, set as a pachinko machine that is the target of execution of the linked expected production). Further, when the output distribution random number value is 30 to 59, it is set so that the left four pachinko machines, the own pachinko machine, and the right two pachinko machines work together. Further, when the output distribution random number value is 60 to 89, the two pachinko machines on the left side, its own pachinko machine, and the right four pachinko machines are set to work together. Further, when the output distribution random number value is 90 to 93, it is set so that the left five pachinko machines, the own pachinko machine, and the right one pachinko machine work together. Further, when the output distribution random number value is 94 to 97, it is set to be interlocked by one pachinko machine on the left side, its own pachinko machine, and five pachinko machines on the right side. Further, when the output distribution random number value is 98, it is set that the left six pachinko machines and their own pachinko machines are linked together. Further, when the output distribution random number value is 99, it is set to interlock with its own pachinko machine and the six right pachinko machines.

  In this embodiment, information regarding the output direction and the number of winning waves set by the effect control program (information regarding the amplitude of the winning wave to be output) is referred to as “output setting information”. The output setting information includes a right output flag indicating whether or not the winning wave should be output on the right side and a left output flag indicating whether or not the winning wave should be output on the left side.

  Of these, the right output flag is set to “1” when at least one pachinko machine should execute the interlocked expected effect on the right side of its own pachinko machine, and the target of execution of the interlocked expected effect on this right side When there is no pachinko machine to be set, “0” is set. On the other hand, this left output flag sets the left output flag to “1” when at least one pachinko machine on the left side of its own pachinko machine should perform the interlocking expected performance. When there is no pachinko machine that is the execution target of the interlocking expected effect on the left side, it is set to “0”.

  When the right output flag is “1” (step S3004 in FIG. 61), the effect control program reserves the output by storing the winning wave right output instruction command in the winning wave right output buffer (step S3005). The winning wave right output instruction command reserved for output may include intensity information related to the magnitude of amplitude (an example of intensity) in accordance with the number of pachinko machines that should reach the winning wave. On the other hand, when the left output flag is “1” (step S3006), the effect control program makes an output reservation by storing the winning wave left output instruction command in the winning wave left transmission buffer (step S3007). The winning wave left output instruction command reserved for output may include intensity information regarding amplitude (an example of intensity) in accordance with the number of pachinko machines to which the winning wave is to be reached.

  In addition, when the right output flag and the left output flag are each “0”, the effect control program sets the winning wave right output instruction command and the winning wave left output instruction command to the winning wave right sending buffer and the winning wave left sending buffer, respectively. Is not stored. In the present embodiment, the winning wave right output instruction command and the winning wave left output instruction command are collectively referred to as “winning wave output instruction command”. That is, in this case, the effect control program does not reserve the output of the winning wave side output instruction command.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the winning wave is detected by the wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b, the internal lottery is performed from the time of detection until the fish production based on the winning wave is executed. Even if the winning is made, the output processing of the winning wave from the wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b is invalidated. That is, the effect control program reserves the winning wave output reservation even if it is determined in step S3001 that the winning information is a big hit during the period from when the winning wave is detected until the fish school effect based on the winning wave is executed. The process ends (NO in step S3001), and the winning wave is not output. Thereby, duplication of the school of fish production as the interlocking expected production in each pachinko machine 1 can be eliminated.

(Winning wave output execution process)
Next, the winning wave output execution processing will be described with reference to FIG. This winning wave output execution process is performed when the winning wave right output instruction command exists in the winning wave right transmission buffer or when the winning wave left output instruction command exists in the above and the winning wave left transmission buffer. This is a process for actually outputting the winning wave.

  First, the effect control program determines whether or not a winning wave right output instruction command indicating that the winning wave should be output from the right side exists in the winning wave right transmission buffer (step S3020). When there is no winning wave right output instruction command, the effect control program ends the winning wave output execution process.

  Here, when the winning wave right output instruction command exists, the effect control program controls the waveform control board 425 by outputting the winning wave right output instruction command to the waveform control board 425, and this waveform control. The board 425 gives a winning wave right output instruction command to the wave transmitting / receiving device 188b from the right wave output right port, and causes the wave receiving / receiving device 188b to output the winning wave (step S3021). Here, the amplitude of this winning wave is the number of pachinko machines that are subject to the execution of the interlocking expected effect in the gaming machine row among the pachinko machines that are located in the right direction when viewed from the own pachinko machine (the interlocking expected effect should be executed). The amplitude is determined according to the distance to the endmost gaming machine. Here, when the right direction of the pachinko machine that is the transmission source is in the upstream direction of the interlocking expected performance, the primary winning wave is first output, and a predetermined period (for example, 100 ms) has elapsed from the output of the primary winning wave. Later, the secondary winning wave is output. On the other hand, when the right direction of the pachinko machine that is the transmission source corresponds to the downstream direction of the interlocking expected effect, only the primary winning wave is output. The winning wave is transmitted with the amplitude determined as described above (including the intensity information of the winning wave right output instruction command if necessary).

  On the other hand, the effect control program determines whether or not a winning wave left output instruction command exists in the winning wave left transmission buffer (step S3022). When the winning wave left output instruction command does not exist, the effect control program ends the winning wave output execution process. When this winning wave left output instruction command exists, the production control program outputs the winning wave left instruction command to the waveform control board 425 to control the waveform control board 425, and the waveform control board 425 A winning wave output instruction command is given to the wave transmitting / receiving device 188a from the winning wave output left port, and the wave receiving / receiving device 188a outputs the winning wave (step S3023). Here, the amplitude of this winning wave is the number of pachinko machines that are the target of execution of the interlocked expected effect in the gaming machine row among the pachinko machines that are located in the left direction as viewed from the own pachinko machine (the expected interlocked effect should be executed). The amplitude is determined according to the distance to the endmost gaming machine. Here, when the left direction of the pachinko machine that is the transmission source corresponds to the upstream direction of the interlocking expected performance, the primary winning wave is first output, and a predetermined period (for example, 100 ms) has elapsed from the output of the primary winning wave. Later, the secondary winning wave is output. On the other hand, when the left direction of the pachinko machine that is the transmission source is the downstream direction of the interlocking expected effect, only the primary winning wave is output. The winning wave is transmitted with the amplitude determined as described above (including the intensity information of the winning wave left output instruction command if necessary).

  In this embodiment, the winning wave output timings in steps S3021 and S3023 are the fish production start point and the fish production start time determined with reference to the table shown in FIG. That is, as described above, the execution command is determined based on the production command (variation time) transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810, and the fish production production start point and the fish production production start included in the execution command are determined. Based on the time, the output timing of the winning wave is determined with reference to the table shown in FIG. Then, the effect control program counts the elapsed time from the start of symbol variation by an effect timing management timer (not shown), and controls the waveform control board 425 to output the winning wave when the determined output timing is reached.

(Winning wave detection process)
Next, the winning wave detection process will be described with reference to FIG. This winning wave detection process is a process included in the interrupt process executed by the effect control program under the control of the CPU 811 of the peripheral control board 810 every 2 ms, for example. The winning wave detection process is a process for detecting a winning wave output when a surrounding pachinko machine wins in the big win lottery.

  First, the CPU 811 of the peripheral control board 810 controls the waveform control board 425 by the operation of the effect control program, and the selected wave left transmission / reception port and the selected wave right transmission / reception port (for selection wave detection) corresponding to the wave transmission / reception devices 188a and 188b, respectively. Port). These wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b refer to the corresponding selected wave left transmitting / receiving port and the selected wave right transmitting / receiving port (step S3030).

  Then, the effect control program determines whether or not the primary winning wave is detected in the winning wave left transmission / reception port and the winning wave right transmission / reception port (step S3031). Here, if it is determined that the primary winning wave is not detected in either the winning wave left transmitting / receiving port or the winning wave right transmitting / receiving port, the winning wave transmitting / receiving process is terminated. On the other hand, when the primary winning wave has arrived at either the winning wave left transmission / reception port or the winning wave right transmission / reception port, the effect control program indicates whether or not the continuous expectation effect should be executed. Is initialized to OFF (step S3032).

  Then, the production control program detects the secondary winning wave by the wave receiving / receiving devices 188a and 188b within a predetermined period (for example, 100 ms) from the time point when the primary winning wave is detected by the wave receiving / receiving devices 188a and 188b. It is determined whether or not it has been done (step S3033). If the secondary winning wave is detected within the predetermined period, the own pachinko machine is located upstream in the direction of the effect as viewed from the winning pachinko machine, and therefore the expected effect execution flag is set to “ON ( 1) "(step S3034). On the other hand, if the secondary winning wave is not detected within the predetermined period, the own pachinko machine is located downstream in the direction of the direction of the presentation as seen from the winning pachinko machine. “OFF (0)” is set (step S3035).

  Here, in step S3033, it is determined whether or not the secondary winning wave has been received within the “predetermined period” because the secondary winning wave has the same output source as the primary winning wave received earlier (winning This is to specify whether the machine is a pachinko machine or not. Therefore, even if the secondary winning wave is detected after detecting the primary winning wave, if the secondary winning wave is detected over a predetermined period, the primary winning wave detected first is output. It is determined that the source (winning pachinko machine) is different, and the expected performance execution flag is set to “OFF (0)” (step S3035).

  Furthermore, when the expected effect execution flag is set to “ON (1)” in step S3034, the effect control program analyzes this secondary winning wave (step S3036). An example of the analysis content is to acquire the amplitude of the detected secondary winning wave. In the present embodiment, the amplitude of the secondary winning wave is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any element may be analyzed as long as the attenuation of the secondary winning wave can be confirmed.

  Next, the effect control program determines which one of the selected wave left transmission / reception port and the selected wave right transmission / reception port the selected wave transmission / reception port passes through (step S3037). In the case of passing through the right transmission / reception port, the winning wave right detection flag that was “OFF (0)” is set to “ON (1)” (step S3038), while passing through the winning wave transmission / reception left port. If it is, the winning wave left detection flag that was “OFF (0)” is set to “ON (1)” (step S3039). The winning wave right detection flag and the winning wave left detection flag respectively indicate that the direction of the detected secondary winning wave output source (winning pachinko machine) is right and left.

  In addition, when the own pachinko machine is the source of the winning wave (that is, when it is the winning pachinko machine), the production control program executes the linked expected production regardless of whether or not the secondary winning wave is detected. In order to do this, the expected performance execution flag is set to “ON (1)” (step S3034).

(Production timing decision processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the effect timing determination process will be described. This effect timing determination process is a process of determining an effect timing at which the receiving pachinko machine that has received the secondary winning wave and the winning pachinko machine that has transmitted the secondary winning wave should execute the interlocking expected effect. Here, the details of the effect timing determination process are different between the receiving pachinko machine and the winning pachinko machine.

  First, the effect control program of the receiving pachinko machine obtains the amplitude of the output waveform of the winning wave included in the secondary winning wave detected by the wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b and the above-mentioned predetermined reference amplitude value (intensity information). In comparison, the attenuation amount of the secondary winning wave is checked (step S3040). Then, it is determined whether or not the expected performance execution flag is “ON” (step S3042). When the expected effect execution flag is not “ON” (when it is “OFF”), the effect timing determination process is terminated as the fish effect as the interlocked expected effect should not be executed. On the other hand, when the expected effect execution flag is “ON”, the effect control program determines that the fish school effect as the interlocked expected effect should be executed. Then, based on the attenuation amount of the secondary winning wave acquired in step S3040, with reference to the attenuation amount determination table shown in FIG. 48, the production timing of the interlocking expected effect in the own device is determined (step S3043).

  On the other hand, the effect control program of the winning pachinko machine does not check the attenuation amount of the secondary winning wave in step S3040, and the expected effect execution flag is “ON” as described above (YES in step S3042). Then, the production timing of the interlocking expected production in the own machine is determined (step S3043). Here, in step S3043, instead of the amount of attenuation of the secondary winning wave, the start timing of the fish production determined by the own device (the output timing of the winning wave) as described above and the execution of the interlocking expected effect determined by the own device Based on the range, the production timing at which the linked expected production is to be executed is acquired by the own device.

  In this embodiment, if each presentation control program of the receiving pachinko machine and the winning pachinko machine determines that the own machine is an execution target of the interlocking expected production, whether or not the fish production is actually performed in the subsequent processing. Regardless of this, the expected effect notification lamp (for example, the frame decoration lamp 842) is controlled to be lit. Specifically, if the own machine is an execution target of the interlocked expected effect, the effect control timing timer is not only in the case where the expected effect execution flag is “ON” but also in the case where it is “OFF”. Until the value reaches 1000, that is, for the first 2000 ms, the interlocking effect notification lamp blinks. As a result, the pachinko machine that is the target of execution of the linked expectation effect is given to the player and the hall visitor regardless of whether or not the fish school effect is actually executed. Will be announced.

(Production video display processing)
Next, the effect image display process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of effect video display processing. FIGS. 65 to 73 are image diagrams showing examples of special effect images displayed as examples of fish school effects as linked expected effects. This effect video display processing is performed for each pachinko machine that is the target of execution of the linked expectation effect, as described above, based on the effect timing determined in the winning pachinko machine, a special effect video for executing the fish school effect respectively. This is the actual display process.

  First, in the effect display device 115 of each pachinko machine, various effect displays are executed according to the progress of the game by the player by the effect control of the effect control program of the peripheral control board 810. When a random lottery is executed, the lottery result (a jackpot or a loss) is derived by a decorative symbol variation display. That is, the effect control program determines the change pattern and stop symbol of the execution command according to the winning result and the change time included in the effect command based on the effect command received from the main control board 710, and the display device control board 816 is controlled to display the variation pattern and the stop symbol on the effect display device 115.

  In addition, the effect control program determines whether or not its own effect timing has come, that is, whether or not the effect management timing timer has reached its own effect timing (for example, whether it is “1550”) (step S3051). . Here, when the production management timing timer reaches its own production timing, it performs display control of the fish production as the linked expected production, but the following processing is performed depending on whether the own machine is a receiving pachinko machine or a winning pachinko machine. Is different.

  First, the effect control program of the receiving pachinko machine determines whether or not the winning wave left detection flag is “ON (1)” (whether or not the secondary winning wave is received by the wave transmitting / receiving device 188a) ( Step S3052). That is, here, it is determined whether or not the secondary winning wave detected by the waveform control board 425 has arrived from the output source (winning pachinko machine) in the left direction as viewed from its own pachinko machine.

  Here, the effect control program of the receiving pachinko machine selects a special effect image (first effect image) in which a fish school effect flows from right to left when the secondary winning wave is detected from the left direction. (Step S3053), the display about the selected first effect image is instructed (Step S3055). On the other hand, if the winning wave right detection flag is “ON (1)”, it means that the secondary winning wave is detected from the right direction. Therefore, the special effect image (second effect) in which the fish school effect flows from left to right. (Video) is selected (step S3054), and display regarding the selected second effect video is instructed (step S3055).

  As an instruction to display this special effect image, for example, the effect control program instructs the display device control board 816 to display the effect image. Here, in the display device control board 816, as described above, the VDP 838 reads out the effect video data (first effect video data or second effect image data) selected from the image ROM 839 in accordance with the instruction of the CPU 832 and the read out. Based on the effect video data, the first effect image SP1 (see, for example, FIGS. 66 to 69) or the second effect image SP2 (for example, FIGS. 70 to 73) is displayed as the “special interlocking image” displayed at the time of the expected interaction effect. Are displayed on the effect display device 115.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66 to 73, in the effect display device 115, the “special interlocking images” (first effect image SP1 and second effect image SP2) displayed at the time of the interlocking expected effect are: The “game effect image” is displayed so as to overlap with the “game effect image” that is executed independently on each pachinko machine as a reach effect (single expectation effect). Below, the display mode in the effect display device 115 at the time of the interlocking expected effect will be described more specifically.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69, a display mode in the case where the first effect image SP1 based on the first effect image data is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 115 will be described. First, in the display mode shown in FIG. 66, the front part of the school of fish as an example of the first effect image SP1 is displayed on the right side of the display area of the effect display device 115, and the school of fish moves from right to left as time passes. As shown in FIG. 67, almost the entire school of fish appears in the entire display area of the effect display device 115. When the time further elapses, the school of fish advances to the left as in the display mode shown in FIG. 68, and a slightly rear part of this school of fish is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 115. When the time further elapses, as shown in the display mode shown in FIG. 69, this fish school advances further to the left, and the tail of this fish school is displayed on the left side of the display area of the effect display device 115.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 70 to 73, a display mode in the case where the second effect image SP1 based on the second effect image data is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 115 will be described. First, in the display mode shown in FIG. 70, the front portion of the school of fish as an example of the second effect image SP2 is displayed on the left side of the display area of the effect display device 115, and the school of fish moves from left to right as time passes. As shown in FIG. 71, almost the entire school of fish appears in the entire display area of the effect display device 115. When the time further elapses, the school of fish advances to the right as in the display mode shown in FIG. 72, and a slightly rear part of this school of fish is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 115. When the time further elapses, as shown in the display mode shown in FIG. 73, this fish school advances further to the right, and the tail of this fish school is displayed on the right side of the display area of the effect display device 115.

  As described above, in the receiving pachinko machine 1 that detects both the primary winning wave and the secondary winning wave, which of the first effect image SP1 and the second effect image SP2 is selected depends on whether the second winning wave is left or right. Judgment is made based on which direction is received. That is, when the secondary winning wave is received from the wave transmission / reception device 188a, since the reception pachinko machine is on the right side of the winning pachinko machine, the second effect image SP2 in which the effect medium proceeds from right to left is selected. Further, when the secondary winning wave is received from the wave transmitting / receiving device 188b, the reception pachinko machine is on the left side of the winning pachinko machine, and thus the first effect image SP1 in which the effect medium advances from the left to the right is selected. That is, in the receiving pachinko machine, an effect image in which a school of fish as an effect medium progresses in the direction in which the secondary winning wave is received is selected.

  On the other hand, the winning pachinko machine 1 that outputs the primary winning wave and the secondary winning wave is different from the receiving pachinko machine 1 in the effect video display process. That is, when the production management timing timer reaches its production timing (YES in step S3051), the production control program of the winning pachinko machine 1 replaces it with checking the winning wave left detection flag in step S3052, The direction in which the secondary winning wave is output is determined. Here, if the secondary winning wave is output in the right direction, the first effect image in which the fish effect is flowing from the right to the left is selected (step S3053). On the other hand, if the secondary winning wave is output in the left direction, the second effect image in which the fish school effect flows from left to right is selected (step S3054). With this process, unlike the receiving pachinko machine 1, the winning pachinko machine 1 selects an effect image in which the school of fish as the effect medium advances from the direction in which the secondary winning wave is transmitted in the opposite direction.

  As a result, in the receiving pachinko machine and the winning pachinko machine, the production medium advances in the same direction in all the pachinko machines in which the interlocking expected production is executed only by specifying the direction in which the second winning wave is received or transmitted. An optimal effect image can be selected, and an effect mode in which an appearance in which a plurality of pachinko machines are integrally linked can be realized.

  In the present embodiment, these “special interlocking images” (first effect image SP1 and second effect image SP2) shown in FIGS. 66 to 73 are each an interval of effect timing (for example, in both adjacent pachinko machines) 1100 ms), after the neighboring pachinko machine displays the production video for 800 ms, the own pachinko machine starts displaying the production video, so the gaming machine train composed of these adjacent pachinko machines and the own pachinko machine Thus, one of the effect images SP1 and SP2 is continuously displayed in conjunction with each other.

  In this way, according to the present embodiment, when the display of the effect image over 1100 ms by the adjacent pachinko machine is nearing the end, the display of the effect image is continued to be started in the own pachinko machine. The presentation video on the pachinko machine will be in a form of cooperation, and the sense of unity of the linked expectation effect executed across multiple pachinko machines that make up the gaming machine island will increase, and the player will be visually messed up so that the entertainment will not run out can do.

  By the way, in the interlocked expectation effect of this embodiment, after confirming that the winning flag is ON in the winning pachinko machine, other pachinko machines at the own effect timing (that is, the final effect timing in the interlocked expectation effect). The production mode is different from the production mode displayed on the machine. Specifically, the production control program is a specification that represents winning in a lottery lottery, for example, on its own pachinko machine, instead of a special production image (special linked image) displayed as a linked expected production on other pachinko machines. It is possible to display an effect video (special interlocking image for winning notification). Switching of the effect image based on the winning to the internal lottery is performed in step S3055.

  Here, the presentation control program of the winning pachinko machine 1 receives the winning wave from the outside, and when the own machine wins before the execution of the fish school effect, the winning wave is not output as described above, but step S3055. The effect video is switched as described above. In other words, if you win the internal lottery from the time when the winning wave is received from the outside before the linked expectation effect based on the winning wave is executed, the condition that the movement of the own aircraft has not ended when the fish production effect is executed In step S3055, the display image is switched from a normal special interlocking image (for example, a lost fish school effect) to a special notification image for winning notification (for example, a winning fish school effect).

  Thereby, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention, when the winning wave is detected by the wave receiving and receiving devices 188a and 188b, the lost fish school effect is always executed, while when the winning wave is detected by the wave receiving and receiving devices 188a and 188b. Even so, when the own pachinko machine 1 is won by the internal lottery before the fish school effect is executed, the winning fish school effect is executed instead of the lost fish school effect. Thereby, the discrepancy between the lottery result in the pachinko machine 1 and the derived contents of the lottery result by the fish school effect can be avoided.

  Here, in the above example, in the winning pachinko machine, an effect image in which the effect medium travels in the direction opposite to the reception direction of the secondary winning wave is selected, but any other appropriate effect image can be selected. Techniques can be employed. For example, since the winning pachinko machine knows the output direction of the secondary winning wave output by itself, it produces the direction opposite to the output direction of the secondary winning wave, regardless of the receiving direction of the secondary winning wave. An effect image in which the medium progresses may be selected.

  In addition, as an effect mode different from other pachinko machines in the winning pachinko machine, for example, although the effect control program should originally display a special effect image (special interlocking image) at its own effect timing, It can be mentioned that this effect image is not displayed. In this way, the player of each pachinko machine that constitutes the gaming machine train must display a special production video on his or her own pachinko machine after the next pachinko machine has finished displaying the production video. For example, since it is possible to know that his / her pachinko machine has won the jackpot, he / she can keep waiting while praying that no special performance image will be displayed on his / her own pachinko machine.

  The effect medium included in the “special interlocking images” (the first effect image SP1 and the second effect image SP2) that are special effect images displayed on the effect display device 115 is not limited to the fish school as shown in the figure. Needless to say, other moving bodies may be used.

[Specific examples of linked expectations in gaming machines]
Here, with reference to FIG. 74 to FIG. 83, a specific example of the interlocked expectation effect executed in conjunction with the plurality of pachinko machines 1 in the gaming machine row will be described. 74 to 83 show an example of the front of each pachinko machine and an effect mode of each pachinko machine in three of a plurality of gaming machine trains, for example.

  First, FIG. 74 shows the determination and variation of jackpot lottery (internal lottery processing) triggered by winning at the start ports 600 and 604, for example, in the pachinko machines shown in FIGS. A state in which a series of operations such as start to stop of fluctuation is performed. FIG. 75 shows that the reach state is displayed in the display area in the effect display device 115 in the pachinko machine shown in FIG. At this stage, it is not possible for the player to determine whether or not FIG. Further, in any of the pachinko machines shown in (a), (b), and (c) of the same figure, the frame decoration lamp 842 as the expected effect notification lamp is not lit.

  FIG. 76 shows that the expected effect notification lamps (frame decoration lamps 842) are turned on all at once in the pachinko machines shown in FIGS. This is because the pachinko machines shown in (a), (b), and (c) of the figure are the targets of execution of the interlocking expectation effect, and one of these pachinko machines is surely winning the jackpot lottery. Is shown. Furthermore, in the extreme end pachinko machine of (c) located on the most upstream side in the direction of travel of the fish production as an interlocking expected effect, a “special interlocking image” (hereinafter referred to as a special effect image) in the display area of the effect display device 115 , Described as a fish school image 1130.). Here, each player in (a), (b), and (c) of the figure “whether his / her table may have been won” regardless of whether or not his / her table is reach. Have a sense of expectation. In particular, the reach production in the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 2B has not yet ended, and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1A has entered the reach state. The player's heart is tossed. The fish school image 1130 advances through the gaming machine row from right to left (or from left to right) so as to pass in a pre-controlled production direction. Since the fish school image 1130 only passes through a slack pachinko machine, the player recognizes that his or her pachinko machine is a losing table only after the school of fish has passed through his or her pachinko machine. However, in the present embodiment, the swimming mode of the fish school in the fish school image 1130 is an example, and it is possible to control the fish school that has passed once within the range of the production time. Therefore, any player can expect that the school of fish may come back after passing their pachinko machine.

  By the way, when the fish school image 1130 arrives at the winning pachinko machine that is the transmission source of the winning wave (that is, when it becomes the execution timing of the interlocking expectation effect in the winning pachinko machine), the winning pachinko machine has an interlocking expectation effect on other pachinko machines. An effect mode different from the effect mode is executed. That is, the special interlocking image (fish school image 1130) displayed on the effect display device 115 of the winning pachinko machine is different from the special interlocking image (fish school image 1130) displayed on the effect display device 115 of the other pachinko machine. . Therefore, in the winning pachinko machine, the player can recognize that his / her pachinko machine is a big hit stand by visually recognizing the effect mode displayed on the effect display device 115. Here, in the winning pachinko machine, the “effect mode different from the mode of play on other pachinko machines” is, for example, formed by displaying “big hit” characters so that the fish school performs a mass game in the fish image 1130. Other examples include swimming so that the school of fish changes direction and comes toward the player, or swims away and turns away from the player. In this manner, in the special interlocking image (fish school image 1130) displayed on the effect display device 115, it is a big hit that the school of fish has an effect mode different from that of other pachinko machines. When the fish image 1130 is displayed, the player of the pachinko machine in c) keeps on wishing that “the fish school does not pass, but want other show modes to be shown on its own stand”, and the fish school passes completely. Until you continue (until the linked production notification lamp goes off)

  77, the pachinko machines in FIGS. (A), (b) and (c) perform a fish school effect (display control of the fish school image 1130) as an interlocked expected effect, and the pachinko machine in FIG. When the school of fish moves to the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 5B, it shows that it is appearing in the pachinko machine shown in FIG. Further, when the fish school images 1130 displayed in FIGS. 2B and 2C are closely viewed, it can be confirmed that small fish have gathered to form a large fish. This so-called “big fish” is easier to see when viewed at a distance than pachinko machines, and it can appeal to other players and visitors to the hall as an exhibition that is linked to the machine line. it can.

  FIG. 78 shows a fish school effect (display control of the fish school image 1130) as an interlocked expected effect in conjunction with the pachinko machines of FIGS. (A), (b), and (c). As with the movement of the school of fish from the pachinko machine of FIG. 8B to the pachinko machine of FIG. 8B, the school moves from the pachinko machine of FIG. 9B to the pachinko machine of FIG. This shows that a school of fish is appearing in the pachinko machine shown in FIG. The appearance of a school of fish on the base of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 11A changes the player's psychology of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

  FIG. 79 shows that the fish production effect (display control of the fish image 1130) as the interlocking expected production in the pachinko machine of FIG. In this way, the expectation effect notification lamp of the pachinko machine that was not a big hit goes off in order after passing the school of fish, so that the pachinko machine where the expectation effect notification lamp is finally lit is a big hit It has come to understand. The flashing effect of the expected effect notification lamp attracts attention because it appears to the player or hall visitors as if they are counting down toward the jackpot.

  FIG. 80 and FIG. 81 are similar to the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 8C. After the display control of the fish school image 1130 on the pachinko machine shown in FIG. This indicates that the lamp has stopped blinking. In addition, the display control of the fish school image 1130 in the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 10A shows that the school of fish arriving at the pachinko machine shown in FIG. . As a result, even if the character “big hit” is not yet displayed on the effect display device 115, other players and hall visitors will say “(a) pachinko machine is a big hit”. I can think of it. In addition, the player of the winning pachinko machine can obtain a sense of superiority that “only one of them was chosen as a big hit among a plurality of pachinko machines”.

  In addition, the fish school image 1130 displayed on the pachinko machine shown in FIGS. 80A and 81A is different from the fish school image 1130 in the other pachinko machines, and the fish school that has moved to the center of the screen of the effect display device 115 Furthermore, the effect of moving and disappearing in the depth direction is made, and this corresponds to a special interlocking image for winning notification (winning fish school effect). Moreover, the fish school image 1130 in another pachinko machine is equivalent to a normal special interlocking image (losing fish school effect).

  FIG. 82 shows that the symbol variation in the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 8A has been completed, and the decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 115 are aligned with the same symbol. Further, FIG. 83 shows that the “big hit” character is displayed on the effect display device 115 after the decoration symbol is stopped. At this time, the expected production notification lamp is not lit on the adjacent pachinko machine that was not a big hit, while the expected production notification lamp is lit on the winning pachinko machine, so that the winning pachinko machine is in the spotlight. Can stand out as if

[References to usefulness according to this embodiment]
In the gaming machine train configured by arranging a plurality of pachinko machines 1 according to the present invention, each pachinko machine 1 executes a jackpot lottery triggered by the start winning prize, and each time the winning of a jackpot lottery is won according to the progress of the game. there is a possibility. Here, the pachinko machine that was won in the jackpot lottery (winning pachinko machine) first outputs a winning wave indicating that it was won in the jackpot lottery. The winning cannot be recognized immediately because the waves cannot be known. Here, the winning pachinko machine outputs the winning wave according to the distance (number) of the pachinko machines that should execute the interlocked expected production among the pachinko machines that make up the gaming machine row, the progress direction of the interlocked expected effect, etc. Yes.

  Generally, when a wave like this winning wave is output, it is known that the amplitude of the wave attenuates according to the transmission distance when the wave is transmitted through the air. In each pachinko machine 1 constituting the gaming machine train, when the winning wave is transmitted or received, it is determined that the own machine is an execution target of the interlocking expected effect. Then, by grasping the amount of attenuation of the amplitude of the detected winning wave, the production timing at which the linked expected production is to be executed is determined according to the amount of attenuation. In addition, by grasping the number of times of detection of the winning wave, it is determined whether or not to execute a special video effect (fish school effect) as an interlocking expected effect in the own device. And when performing an interlocking expected effect in the own machine, a fish school effect is performed by executing display control of a special interlocking image as an interlocking expected effect based on the effect timing determined according to the attenuation amount.

  As a specific example of the present invention, according to the aspect of this attenuation amount (specifically, according to the number of pachinko machines in which a fish school effect is actually performed among a plurality of pachinko machines to be subjected to the interlocking expected effect) ), The mode of the linked expectation effect may be varied. As described above, generally, when a wave like a winning wave is output, the amplitude of the wave attenuates according to the transmission distance when the wave is transmitted through the air. Depending on the intensity, the production mode is varied. For example, when the intensity of the winning wave is strong (when there are a large number of pachinko machines subject to execution of the interlocking expected effect), when the intensity of the winning wave is small (when the number of pachinko machines subject to execution of the interlocking expected effect is small) If the number is small), there may be variations such as small school of fish. Of course, it cannot be overemphasized that aspects other than a school of fish may be sufficient.

  In this manner, for example, in the gaming machine line of the hall, each pachinko machine located between the most pachinko machine from the most pachinko machine to the winning pachinko machine, In accordance with the arrangement order, the interlocking expected effects are sequentially executed at each effect timing. For this reason, in this gaming machine train, first, the most pachinko machine executes the interlocking expected effect, and when the execution is completed, the adjacent pachinko machine executes the interlocking expected effect and the execution is completed. It will repeat. For this reason, each pachinko machine continuously performs the interlocking expectation effect from the endmost pachinko machine to the winning pachinko machine. In the present embodiment, when winning in the big hit lottery, the winning expectation pachinko machine is configured to execute the interlocking expected effect in a manner different from other pachinko machines.

  Therefore, when the player of each pachinko machine 1 recognizes that the interlocking expected performance performed by each pachinko machine 1 of this gaming machine row is approaching, at least one player including the player's own machine is included in this gaming machine row. It can be recognized that the pachinko machine of is surely won. Therefore, the player of each pachinko machine has the convenience that the pachinko machine that has been elected in this gaming machine line is surely present, so that his / her pachinko machine may have been elected. The delusion is inflated, and it will continue to wait with a great expectation as if it has been confirmed that it will benefit from winning.

  Moreover, each time one pachinko machine completes the expected interlocking production and the next pachinko machine starts the interlocking expected production, the probability that this pachinko machine is elected is even higher. Every time a single pachinko machine completes the interlocking expectation effect, it is possible to have a greater expectation while being immersed in the delusion of winning, and to increase the game motivation.

  By the way, if the amplitude of the winning wave output by the winning pachinko machine is determined in advance, if the winning pachinko machine wins in an internal lottery, the most advanced pachinko machine that executes the linked expectation effect first The distance (number) from the winner to the winning pachinko machine will be determined in advance. Therefore, if a player, a hall visitor, etc. continues to observe for a while which one of the most advanced pachinko machines will perform the linked expected production first, the most advanced pachinko machine will begin to perform the linked expected production first. It may be possible to identify which pachinko machine is the winning pachinko machine based on the position of the machine.

  However, in this embodiment, the winning pachinko machine cannot be specified in the gaming machine row as follows. That is, the winning pachinko machine will change the amplitude and output direction of the winning wave every time it outputs, in order to appropriately change the range of pachinko machines (ie, the number of arrangements or distance to the shortest pachinko machine) that is the target of execution of the interlocking expected production. It can be changed freely.

  Therefore, even if the winning pachinko machine in the gaming machine row is the same in the previous winning and the current winning, the position of the most advanced pachinko machine that performs the interlocking expected production together with the winning pachinko machine is There is a high possibility that it will be different from the winning this time, and regularity will be lost in the number of pachinko machines that perform the linked expected production. For this reason, even if the surrounding players and hall visitors can find the position of the most advanced pachinko machine that will first execute the interlocking expected production, the position of the winning pachinko machine in the gaming machine line must be specified completely Can not be. In addition, since the number of pachinko machines on which the linked expected performance is executed changes every time, it is not only possible to avoid making one pattern of the production range, but it is also difficult to specify the winning table, so the game of losers It can give a sense of expectation to those who may have won.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a winning pachinko machine is generated in the gaming machine train, the player of each pachinko machine between the winning pachinko machine and the end pachinko machine completely identifies the winning pachinko machine in the gaming machine train In a situation where you can not do it, when a pachinko machine that performs linked expectation production gradually approaches, it is certain that you will be winning and you will surely enjoy the benefits of jackpot The game can be continued while expecting as if. For this reason, each player does not exhaust the interest in the game, and continues to play the game while increasing the game motivation.

  Here, normally, the probability of winning a big win lottery in any one pachinko machine that constitutes such a row of gaming machines may be low, but it is won in any of the pachinko machines that constitute this gaming machine row. The probability of doing is relatively high. In addition, as the number of pachinko machines constituting the gaming machine train increases, the probability of winning in any of the pachinko machines constituting the gaming machine train inevitably increases.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, as the number of pachinko machines 1 constituting the gaming machine row increases, the frequency of winning in any one of the pachinko machines increases, and each player frequently has an expectation. As the number of players increases, each player has more opportunities to increase their willingness to play. Can be.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, since there is no extra thing such as wiring physically connected to the adjacent pachinko machine and the visibility of the hall clerk is good, the hall clerk can make it difficult to overlook fraud, Cheating itself can be deterred. Furthermore, since work such as wiring is unnecessary, the work of installing the pachinko machine 1 and the like in the gaming machine train is easy.

  In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 has won an internal lottery, the effect control program (CPU 811) of the peripheral control board 810 outputs a winning wave indicating that the internal lottery has been won. As a direction to be selected, at least one of the one direction and the other direction along the arrangement direction of the gaming machine row is selected. The wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b independently output the selected wave toward the determined output direction.

  First, if your pachinko machine 1 is a winning pachinko machine, if the output direction of the winning wave to be output is fixed, you can see how multiple pachinko machines perform linked expected performance in conjunction with each other. At first glance, although the number of pachinko machines that perform the linked expected performance changes every time, the approximate range of which pachinko machine is the winning pachinko machine in this output direction. There is a risk that it can be specified.

  However, in the present embodiment, when the own machine is a winning pachinko machine, in order to output a winning wave with one direction or other direction selected along the arrangement direction of each pachinko machine in the gaming machine row as the output direction, Each time the winning wave is output, the output direction becomes irregular. For this reason, even if each player in the gaming machine train carefully observes each pachinko machine that performs the linked expected performance in response to this winning wave, which pachinko machine is selected as the winning pachinko machine from the execution status of each linked expected performance. It becomes impossible to specify whether it is a machine.

  Therefore, the player of each pachinko machine 1 cannot recognize at all which pachinko machine is the winning pachinko machine when any one of the pachinko machines constituting the gaming machine train starts to execute the interlocking expected effect. While praying that his pachinko machine is a winning pachinko machine, he hopes to expand his expectation and continue to wait. For this reason, it is possible to allow each player to continue the game while irregularly stimulating the player's willingness to play each time the winning is made.

  In this embodiment, the following method is adopted as a specific method for determining the production timing. That is, when the effect control program of the peripheral control board 810 detects the winning wave by the wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b, the distance to the winning pachinko machine (in other words, the maximum) In order to correspond to the relative self-position between the end pachinko machine and the winning pachinko machine), the production timing at which the linked expected production is to be executed in the own machine is determined.

  And in each pachinko machine 1, when performing the interlocking expected effect sequentially according to the arrangement order of each pachinko machine from the most end pachinko machine to the winning pachinko machine, determine the effect timing at which the own machine should execute the interlocking expected effect, At this timing, a fish school effect as a linked expected effect is executed, and if it is a winning pachinko machine, the fact that it is won in an internal lottery is derived from this linked expected effect. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 constituting the gaming machine train not only can accurately acquire the effect timing at which the interlocked expected effect should be performed, but also executes the interlocked expected effect at the exact effect timing. Will be able to.

  In this way, each pachinko machine 1 can acquire the effect timing at which the own machine should execute the interlocking expected effect from the amount of attenuation just by detecting the winning wave, so that the aforementioned notice effect is executed almost simultaneously. On the other hand, the interlocking expectation effect is executed at a different timing for each machine. As a result, it is possible to produce a variety of effects by a plurality of pachinko machines, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. Further, unlike the information transmission / reception between the main control board 710 and the peripheral control board 810 described above, control is complicated among a plurality of pachinko machines as in the case of physical (electrical) wiring connection. It is possible to exchange information without any problem. In addition, each pachinko machine does not need to exchange information about the production timing between the winning pachinko machine and the receiving pachinko machine when displaying the interlocking expected production, so that control is not complicated. . In addition, since there is no wiring connection or network connection between a plurality of pachinko machines, no administrative burden is imposed on the hall side.

  In the pachinko machine 1, when the winning wave is acquired, a difference between the amplitude value of the winning wave and a reference amplitude value (intensity information) stored in advance is determined. And as this difference becomes smaller, the time from when the winning wave is detected until the linked expected effect is executed becomes longer. In other words, as the difference between the amplitude value of the winning wave and the reference amplitude value (intensity information) increases, the time from when the winning wave is detected until the linked expected effect is executed becomes shorter. Here, the amplitude value of the winning wave transmitted by the winning pachinko machine is variable, but just because the difference between the amplitude value of the winning wave received by the receiving pachinko machine and the reference amplitude value (intensity information) is not necessarily large. It is not always far from the winning table. In other words, if the number of pachinko machines that perform interlocking expected effects is small, the time from when the interlocking expected effects are displayed on the winning pachinko machine after the start of the interlocking expected effects on the most advanced pachinko machine is shortened Therefore, the winning wave having a smaller amplitude value can be transmitted.

  By the way, in the winning pachinko machine 1, the timing for transmitting the winning wave is varied from time to time based on the above-described fish production start point (fish production start time). In other words, in the winning pachinko machine, the timing when the other pachinko machine starts to execute the interlocked expected effect (for example, when the state of the effect mode (symbol variation) of the own machine is changed to the other machine. The winning wave is output at the determined timing. This is because the winning pachinko machine starts the execution of the linked expected effect on the other pachinko machine at the optimal timing according to the production mode (symbol variation mode) of the own machine.

  As a result, the timing at which the winning wave is released from the winning pachinko machine 1 is not fixed, but is variable every time. Here, if the winning wave transmission timing is unchanged in the winning pachinko machine 1 (for example, constant at the start timing of the symbol fluctuation), the interlocking expected effect is displayed in any of the gaming machines constituting the gaming machine train. Therefore, it can be estimated that the pachinko machine whose symbol variation has started at almost the same timing is the winning base.

  In that regard, according to the present pachinko machine 1, when winning in the internal lottery, the timing at which the winning wave is output is different each time, so that the linked expected effect is started in the other pachinko machines that have picked up the winning wave. The timing will be different each time. Therefore, even if the execution expectation is grasped by paying attention to the interlocking expectation effect displayed on any of the pachinko machines constituting the gaming machine island, the player or the like shall estimate the winning stand from a plurality of pachinko machines. Can be difficult.

  In addition, among the pachinko machines for which the linked expected performance was performed, not only the pachinko machine players whose lottery results are lost, but also the pachinko machine players whose lottery results are winning, It is not possible to identify whether it is a winning table or not. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the players of multiple pachinko machines in which the linked expectation production has been executed, regardless of whether the machine is a winning table or a loser. The decrease can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the wave transmitting / receiving device 188a for detecting the winning wave output from the winning pachinko machine arranged in one direction along the arrangement direction of the gaming machine train as the wave receiving / receiving means, and the arrangement direction of the pachinko machine train Since the wave transmitting / receiving device 188b for detecting the winning wave output by the winning pachinko machine arranged in the direction opposite to the one direction along the line is employed, the following utility can be exhibited.

  According to such a configuration, when the wave transmission / reception device 188a detects the winning wave, it can be determined that the winning wave is output from the one direction, and the winning pachinko machine is arranged in the one direction. It can be recognized as a thing. On the other hand, when the wave transmission / reception device 188b detects the winning wave, it can be determined that the winning wave is output from the opposite direction, and the winning pachinko machine is arranged in the opposite direction to the one direction. Can be recognized.

  For this reason, it is possible to execute an interlocking expected effect according to the arrangement direction of the winning pachinko machine, and let the player of each pachinko machine recognize the arrangement direction of the winning pachinko machine, but which pachinko machine is the winning pachinko machine It can be made not to recognize about. In this way, although there is a winning pachinko machine in the gaming machine row, it is not possible to grasp which pachinko machine including the own pachinko machine is the winning pachinko machine. It is possible to maintain the willingness to play so that the player's interest is not exhausted.

  In the present embodiment, the wave transmitting / receiving device 188a includes a winning wave output unit that outputs a winning wave in one direction (left direction), while the wave receiving / receiving device 188b is in a direction opposite to the one direction ( A winning wave output unit that outputs the winning wave toward the right direction) is included. Further, the image ROM 839 of the display device control board 816 includes first effect video image data used to display a first effect image in which the visual effect medium advances in one direction (left direction), and visual Second effect video image data used for displaying a second effect image in which the effect medium proceeds in the other direction (right direction) is stored in advance.

  Then, when the wave transmitting / receiving device 188a detects the winning wave from the other direction (right direction), the effect control program of the peripheral control board 810 controls to select the first effect image, while the wave transmitting / receiving device 188b is unidirectional. When the winning wave is detected from (left direction), control is performed to select the second effect image. Further, the VDP 838 as the video display control means, based on one of the first effect video data and the second effect video data read from the image ROM 839, in accordance with the effect video selected by the effect control program. One of the second effect images is displayed on the effect display device 115 for a predetermined time at the effect timing.

  With such a configuration, since the production video (fish school production) proceeds as an interlocking expected production from the most pachinko machine constituting the gaming machine row to the winning pachinko machine, from these most pachinko machines Although the player of each pachinko machine up to the winning pachinko machine cannot specifically recognize which pachinko machine is winning, it can recognize the arrangement direction of the winning pachinko machine.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the player of each pachinko machine arranged between these endmost pachinko machines and the winning pachinko machine, the production video (fish school production) is approaching itself as a linked expected production When visually recognized, the player will have a sense of expectation for winning, and further, the expectation for winning will further increase as the production video (fish production) approaches himself as a linked expectation effect.

  For this reason, every time a player wins a big win lottery (internal lottery) in any one of the pachinko machines constituting the gaming machine row, even if the player does not actually win in the pachinko machine 1 that is playing himself In addition, it is possible to continue the game with the expectation of high-pitched sound while suppressing the expectation of boiling each time. According to the present embodiment as described above, since the player's heart can be stimulated on a daily basis without causing the player to feel calm, the player's interest is not exhausted and the player's motivation can be enhanced.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 810 continues to start displaying the effect video on its own pachinko machine before the display of the effect video by the adjacent pachinko machine constituting the gaming machine row is completed. As a result, a part of the effect video in the adjacent pachinko machines is displayed in duplicate, so that the effect video in each pachinko machine has continuity to enhance the sense of unity of the linked expectation effects. On the other hand, various modes can be considered for the time adjustment of the effect image in each pachinko machine.

  For example, after the display of the effect image by the adjacent pachinko machine constituting the gaming machine row is completed, the distance between adjacent pachinko machines (for example, not only the width of the inter-bed sand but also the adjacent ones) The display of the effect image may be started after the start of the display of the effect image is restricted over the passage time when it is assumed that the distance between the effect display devices 115 of both pachinko machines has traveled. If it does in this way, the following usefulness can be exhibited.

  According to this, in this gaming machine row, after the display of the effect video (one of the first effect image and the second effect image) by the adjacent pachinko machine is completed, the next is the effect by the own pachinko machine. When the display of the video is started, there is a waiting time from the completion of the display of the effect video by the adjacent pachinko machine to the start of the display of the effect video by the own pachinko machine.

  Therefore, when the display of the effect video by the adjacent pachinko machine is completed, the player psychologically repeats the delusion as to whether or not the display of the effect video next starts in his pachinko machine during the display waiting time. While being messed up, he keeps waiting while praying that the production video will not be displayed. This player keeps waiting for this display waiting time with the expectation that his pachinko machine has won the internal lottery, so the interest in the game will not be exhausted and the willingness of the game will be maintained be able to.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the following usefulness can be exhibited when the winning wave is a sound wave. First, it is generally known that sound waves are less directional than light. If a winning wave using such light is to be used, it is necessary to mount a light receiver and a light emitter on each pachinko machine 1. If this is done in this way, it is necessary to align the orientation of the light emitter and the light receiver with each other in consideration of the directivity of light in the adjacent pachinko machines, so it takes time to install the pachinko machine in the hall. It can also be considered.

  However, since the pachinko machine 1 does not require a light emitter and a light receiver in the first place, it is not necessary to accurately align the direction of the light emitter and light receiver when installing each pachinko machine in the hall. The pachinko machine 1 uses a sound wave as the selected wave, and the sound wave has relatively less directivity than the light, so that it is not necessary to set the directions of the wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b strictly. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 that uses sound waves as the winning wave can reduce the time and labor required for installation in the hall, and can facilitate the work. Also, in this embodiment, since sound waves are used as the winning wave, communication between other adjacent pachinko machines is possible even if they are not physically connected to other adjacent pachinko machines by wiring or the like. It can be carried out.

  Furthermore, in the said embodiment, the pachinko machine which performs only a notice effect (light emission control of an expected effect notification lamp) from the winning pachinko machine 1, and a pachinko machine which executes not only a notice effect but also a linked expected effect (fish school effect), In addition, the winning wave is transmitted a different number of times. Specifically, the first and second winning waves are sent to the upstream in the direction of the direction of the performance as seen from the winning pachinko machine, as well as the noticed effect, while the expected progress is seen from the winning pachinko machine. Only the primary winning wave in which only the notice effect is performed is transmitted downstream in the direction.

  According to this, the winning pachinko machine 1 can instruct different pachinko machines located in different directions by simply changing the number of times of transmission of the same winning wave, and simplifies the transmission control of the winning wave. Can be In addition, in the receiving pachinko machine, it is possible to interpret different direction instructions simply by counting the number of receptions of the winning wave, for example, to perform only the notice effect, or to perform the linked expected effect as well as the notice effect it can.

  In detail, in the winning pachinko machine 1, if the lottery result is a win, the secondary winning wave is output to the outside of the machine, but the primary winning wave is output prior to the secondary winning wave. In this way, even if the announcement effect and the interlocking expected effect are performed simultaneously on a plurality of pachinko machines by outputting the winning wave twice when the notice effect and the interlocking expectation effect are performed, each pachinko machine It is possible to reduce the deviation that may occur between the two. Further, the primary winning wave is transmitted in a wider range than the secondary winning wave. Specifically, the secondary winning wave is transmitted only to the pachinko machine arranged in one direction from the own machine, and the primary winning wave is transmitted to the pachinko machine arranged in both directions of the own machine. To do.

  As described above, the primary winning wave is output prior to the secondary winning wave, and therefore, in other pachinko machines, the primary winning wave can be received before the secondary winning wave. As a result, the notice effect is performed prior to the interlocking expected effect without complicated control as in the case where each pachinko machine is connected by wire. In other words, each pachinko machine receives the winning wave and executes the notice effect before executing the interlocking expected effect.

  Note that the primary winning wave and the secondary winning wave may be information of different waveforms (for example, different frequencies) or may be information of the same waveform, but are performed without complicated control. From the viewpoint, it is preferable that the primary winning wave and the secondary winning wave are information of the same waveform. However, if the primary winning wave and the secondary winning wave have the same waveform, when these winning waves are received, it is necessary to determine whether to perform a linked expected effect or a notice effect. .

  In this way, the determination of whether to perform the linked expected effect or the notice effect is performed, for example, if the received winning wave is the first information, it is determined (handled) as the primary winning wave and received. If the winning wave is the second information, it can be performed by determining (handling) that it is a secondary winning wave. More specifically, if the second winning wave is not received between the time when the first winning wave is received and the lapse of a certain time, the first winning wave is judged as the primary winning wave and the notice effect is given. (At this time, the linked expectation effect is not performed). As described above, when the second winning wave is not received after the first winning wave is received until a predetermined time elapses, the received first winning wave is reset. Then, when a new winning wave is received thereafter, the new winning wave is determined as the primary winning wave. On the other hand, if the second winning wave is received after the first winning wave is received until a certain period of time elapses, the first winning wave is judged as the primary winning wave and the notice effect is given. Then, the second winning wave is judged as the second winning wave, and a linked expectation effect is performed. However, if the second winning wave is received within a certain period of time after receiving the first winning wave, the primary winning wave (the first winning wave) is received when the second winning wave is received. ) And secondary winning wave (second winning wave) are reset. Then, when a new winning wave is received thereafter, the new winning wave is determined as the first winning wave. However, the method of determining whether to perform the linked expected effect or the notice effect is not limited to this.

  By the way, although the winning pachinko machine 1 that has transmitted the winning wave does not receive or receives the winning wave of its own machine, the notice effect and the linked expected effect are executed in the same manner as the receiving pachinko machine. I made it. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid such a problem that the winning pachinko machine 1 does not display the notice effect or the linked expected effect in the vicinity of the winning pachinko machine 1 even though the noticed effect or the linked expected effect is performed. It is possible to realize an interlocking expectation effect that is executed in conjunction with each other in appearance.

  In addition, as described above, in this pachinko machine 1, the possibility that the interlocking expected effect is executed by performing the notice effect before the execution of the interlocking expected effect (that is, the possibility that the own machine is the winning stand) However, this notice effect is preferably executed at the timing when the winning wave is transmitted or received. This is because it is possible to execute a notice effect on a plurality of pachinko machines almost simultaneously without performing complicated control. In addition, since both the predetermined effect image (decorative pattern, reach effect, etc.) and the special interlocking image are displayed on the same effect display device 115, even if the special interlocking image is displayed as the interlocking expected effect, May not be recognized as a special interlocking image. Therefore, a notice effect is performed prior to the interlocking expected effect, so that a special interlocked image can be displayed in advance.

  Note that the “notice effect” is preferably a mode in which a conspicuous illuminant such as a decorative lamp generally provided in a pachinko machine or a top lamp provided in the vicinity of the pachinko machine is turned on or blinked. . As a result, not only a player who is playing a game on a gaming machine island but also a person who is playing a game on another gaming machine island as well as a player who plays a game on a gaming machine island will be notified The pachinko machine arranged on the gaming machine island can increase the effect of attracting customers.

  Furthermore, by configuring so that the notice effect is executed prior to the interlocking expected effect, it is possible to determine which of the gaming machines the interlocked expectation effect is displayed from among a plurality of pachinko machines constituting the gaming machine island. It is possible to make the player grasp in advance. The player can have a sense of expectation that the result of the internal lottery process will be a win when the notice effect is performed on the gaming machine in which he / she is playing. it can.

  The present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the said embodiment, although the game area board 81 showed what was not joined with the translucent decoration body panel 242, it is not limited to this, You may join mutually. , May be integrally formed. Thereby, further space saving can be achieved, and the assembly process can be simplified.

  Moreover, although the translucent decorative body panel 242 showed what was formed in the shape which exhibits a ripple pattern with resin which has translucency, it is not limited to this, Even if it is another shape Good. Moreover, the translucency of a raw material may be further lower, and translucent appearances, such as milky white, may be exhibited. Since the material is translucent, the translucent decorative body panel 242 becomes more conspicuous in the light emission effect, and the game area plate 81, the gate base 479, and the ball passages 347 and 376 can be made less conspicuous.

  Moreover, although the board | substrate base 348, the left flow down rod 344, and the right flow down rod 345 showed what was arrange | positioned at the layer direction in the front-back direction, it is not limited to this. For example, they may be arranged in parallel or integrally without being arranged in front and rear. Thereby, a suitable downfall can be formed according to the structure of the pachinko machine.

  In addition, the gate base portion 479 has a cylindrical shape and the electric wiring 510 is passed through the inside. However, the gate base portion 479 is not limited to this, and may have, for example, a substantially U-shaped cross section. When the gate base portion 479 is formed in a cylindrical shape, the electric wiring 510 is entirely covered with a light-transmitting material, and it is difficult to visually recognize from the outside due to refraction and reflection. When the gate base 479 that can be formed has a substantially U-shaped cross section, the electrical wiring 510 can be easily disposed on the inner guide portion 512 of the gate base 479 during assembly and maintenance.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the solid decoration body showed what showed a semi-transparent spherical shape, it is not limited to this, A different shape may be sufficient and it does not have translucency. There may be.

  In the above embodiment, the spherical decorative bodies 272 to 275 are fixed decorative bodies. However, the present invention is not limited to this and is a movable accessory or a part of a movable accessory. May be. As a result, the light effect can be changed by the movement of the movable accessory, which can further enhance the interest. In addition, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the accessory can be increased by arranging the accessory behind the game area plate 81. The “movable accessory” refers to a production device having a movable part or a lottery device having a movable part. For example, a lottery apparatus including a decorative body provided with a member that reciprocates using a solenoid or the like as a power source, and a rotating body provided with a winning opening through which a game ball can be won.

  In the said embodiment, what used LED as the light source was mentioned as an example as the light emission board | substrates 502-506, However, It is not limited to these. Further, the light source is not limited to the direct light source as described above, and may use reflected light similarly to the backlight unit 380.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the “interlocked expected effect” called the fish school effect is executed together with the “single expected effect” such as the variation display of the decorative symbol in the large effect display device 115. The execution mode is not limited to this. Hereinafter, the execution aspect of the interlocking expectation effect in the pachinko machine which has another structure is demonstrated with reference to FIG. 84 and FIG. FIG. 84 is a front view of another form of a pachinko machine. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a gaming machine train for explaining an execution mode of an interlocking expected effect in a pachinko machine of another form. In the pachinko machine 1000 shown below, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 1 are not denoted by reference numerals, and only differences from the pachinko machine 1 will be described.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 84, the “interlocking expected effect” may be executed so that a plurality of pachinko machines 1000 in which the entire surface effect display device 1411 occupies almost the entire area of the game board are interlocked. Each pachinko machine 1000 shown in the figure employs a transparent game board (game panel 1409), and a light-transmitting milky white center accessory 1410 is arranged behind the game panel 1409. A full face effect display device 1411 having a display area beyond the center accessory 1410 is arranged behind the accessory 1410. Then, as shown in FIG. 85, in the full face effect display device 1411 of each pachinko machine 1000, “single expectation effect” such as a decorative symbol change display and a normal reach effect is in the opening of the center accessory 1410 in front view. Are displayed only in the first display area 1411a formed. On the other hand, the “interlocked expected effect” such as a fish school effect performed in conjunction with a plurality of pachinko machines 1000 is formed not only in the first display area 1411a in the overall effect display device 1411 but also outside the center accessory 1410 in front view. The second display area 1411b is also executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1000, the substantially central portion of the game area is partitioned by the center actor 1410, and the full face effect display device 1411 is arranged so that a predetermined effect image can be displayed in the game area. ing. An inner area (first display area 1411 a) inside the center combination 1410 located at a substantially central portion of the game area is partitioned and formed so as to be surrounded by the center combination 1410. Here, the “single expectation effect” as a result of the internal lottery process does not need to be shown to a third party, and only needs to be shown to the player of the own machine. From the viewpoint of making it possible to visually recognize both the behavior and the “single expectation effect”, it is preferable that the “single expectation effect” is displayed at a substantially central portion of the game area. On the other hand, the “interlocked expectation effect” is different from the “single expectation effect” that does not need to be shown to a third party, and is mainly intended to show not only the player of the player itself but also the third party. Therefore, the “interlocking expected effect” is also displayed in the outer area (second display area 1411b) outside the center accessory 1410. In other words, by displaying the “interlocked expected effect” without separating the inside and outside of the center accessory 1410, the “interlocked expected effect” is displayed in a wider area than the inner area (first display area 1411a). It was to so. Here, displaying without separating the inside and outside of the center accessory 1410 is a case of displaying without distinguishing between the inside and outside of the center accessory 1410. In other words, regardless of whether or not there is a center accessory 1410, it is displayed in a wider area than the “single expected effect” displayed in the substantially central part (that is, almost the entire area of the full effect display device 1411). It is.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1000, a full face effect display device 1411 is arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1409 so that the game panel 1409 can visually recognize the effect image displayed on the full face effect display device 1411. It is comprised by the transparent member. Here, the overall effect display device 1411 is large enough to display the “interlocked expected effect” in substantially the entire game area. In addition, it is preferable that the game panel 1409 is transparent so that the game area is formed so that the “interlocking expected effect” can be displayed in a wider range. However, the game panel 1409 on which the game area is formed may be fitted into a frame formed of non-transparent resin, wood, or the like.

  In addition, on the entire face effect display device 1411, a predetermined effect image (dynamic image) is always displayed as a “single expectation effect” in a substantially central part of the game area, and in a region other than the substantially central part. Then, an image that does not hinder the visual display of the dynamic image displayed in the substantially central portion is displayed. By doing in this way, the player can grasp the information related to the result of the internal lottery process as long as he / she always pays attention only to the substantially central part of the game area. Here, the dynamic image displayed in the substantially central portion (the first display area 1411a) is an image that brings the interest of the player of the pachinko machine 1000 by variously changing the aspect of the displayed effect image. The image displayed in the region (second display region 1411b) excluding the substantially central portion is an image with little change in the aspect. Further, as a specific example of the dynamic image, for example, symbol variation due to a plurality of decorative symbols is exemplified. Furthermore, as a specific example of the image displayed in the area excluding the substantially central portion, for example, a background image is exemplified. This background image is displayed in layers so as to be behind the predetermined effect image so as not to obstruct the visual display of the dynamic image as the predetermined effect image displayed in the substantially central portion.

  In such a pachinko machine 1000, only when the “interlocked expected effect” is displayed, a dynamic image that changes the aspect of the displayed effect image in various ways is displayed in almost the entire game area (entire effect display device 1411). To be displayed in almost the whole area. As a result, it is possible to visually recognize the display of “interlocking expected effect” for a third party, and it is possible to have interest not only for the player of the player but also for the third party.

  Even in such a case, it is preferable that the “interlocked expected effect” is displayed so as not to hinder the visual display of the dynamic image that is the “single expected effect” in the substantially central portion. This is because the “single expectation effect” can suggest the result of the internal lottery process by the display mode. On the other hand, the “interlocked expectation effect” can only grasp that one of the plurality of pachinko machines constituting the gaming machine row is a win when it is displayed. In addition, for example, only when the dynamic image is always displayed in the substantially central portion and the background image is displayed in the area excluding the substantially central portion, and the “interlocked expected effect” is displayed, the “interlocked expected effect” Is displayed in substantially the entire area, the background image is displayed in the first layer on the farthest side, the “single expectation effect” is displayed in the second layer in front of the first layer, and the frontmost It is preferable to display “interlocking expected effect” on the third layer on the side.

  By the way, in the above example, in both the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1000, the one display device performs the fish school effect as the interlocking expectation effect together with the decorative symbol variation display and the reach effect. It is not limited to such an embodiment. A plurality of display devices may be provided in the pachinko machine, and one display device may perform decorative display variation display, reach production, etc., while another display device may perform fish school production as an interlocking expected production. . In this case, a plurality of display devices may be arranged at different positions, and the interlocking expected effect may be displayed in a manner that does not seem to be related to the decorative design, the reach effect, or the like, or the plurality of display devices are stacked. Thus, the interlocked expectation effect may be displayed in an integrated manner with the decorative design, the reach effect, and the like.

  For example, in a pachinko machine, a transparent electroluminescent display device is arranged on the front side of a conventional liquid crystal display so that a player can visually recognize a liquid crystal display provided behind the electroluminescent display device. . During normal times, the liquid crystal display is used to display decorative symbols, display and reach effects, etc. On the other hand, when a winning wave is received from the outside, the electroluminescence display device uses the school of fish as a linked expected effect. Produce. This makes it easier for players to see that the fish production effect is displayed overlapping with the decorative design and reach production, etc. Can be realized with simple control.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the fish school effect in which the moving body having the fish school as a motif is displayed as the special effect image (special interlocking image) displayed in the “interlocking expected effect”. May be. For example, an animal group such as a dog or a cat or a character group imitating a specific person may be employed as the moving body.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the sound wave is employ | adopted as a winning wave, as long as the influence on a human body is not exerted, you may employ | adopt electromagnetic waves. As the “sound wave” herein, a sound wave such as an audible frequency, a very low frequency, or an ultrasonic wave transmitted through a medium such as air, or a vibration may be employed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the primary winning wave is transmitted from the winning pachinko machine 1 to the pachinko machine that emits the expected effect notification lamp, and further the secondary winning wave is transmitted to the pachinko machine that executes the fish school effect as the linked expected effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode as long as the object of the present invention can be achieved. For example, the pachinko machine that performs only the emission control of the expected effect notification lamp from the winning pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine that performs the fish school effect as the linked expected effect as well as causing the expected effect notification lamp to emit light, respectively. You may make it transmit the winning wave of (period). According to this, in the receiving pachinko machine, it is possible to appropriately determine whether to perform only the light emission control of the expected effect notification lamp or to execute the fish school effect only by analyzing the frequency (cycle) of the winning wave. .

  Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but the gaming machine other than the pachinko machine, for example, a pachislot machine, a gaming machine in which the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine are combined, etc. The invention can be applied.

  By the way, the following technical idea can be grasped from the gaming machine of the present embodiment described above. The following technical ideas are provided alone or in appropriate combination. In addition, since the following technical ideas express the present embodiment as the technical idea, the terms described in the present embodiment are expressed in terms of a higher level concept.

[Technology 1]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 is
A gaming machine that configures a gaming machine train in a state of being arranged in plural, and that performs individual independent gaming operations in the gaming machine train,
A launching means capable of launching a game ball toward the game area;
A receiving port capable of receiving a game ball launched toward the game area by the launching means;
Effect image display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image;
Main control means for controlling the progress of the gaming operation;
And other control means for controlling the effect image displayed on the effect image display means, which is wired to the main control means,
The main control means includes
An acceptance detection means for detecting acceptance of a game ball at the acceptance port;
Lottery means for performing an internal lottery process based on detection of acceptance of a game ball by the acceptance detection means;
When the result of the internal lottery process is a win, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player;
Information transmission means for transmitting the result of the internal lottery process and the information related to the predetermined effect image displayed on the effect image display means to the other control means connected by wire to the other control means via the wire And having
The other control means includes
Information receiving means for receiving the information transmitted from the main control means via the wiring;
Based on the information received by the information receiving means, a predetermined effect image as a result of the internal lottery process is displayed on the effect image display means, and when the result of the lottery process is successful, Effect image display control means for displaying a special image as the predetermined effect image,
The other control means further includes:
A first information outflow unit that causes the first information to flow out to a predetermined area outside the machine, on condition that the information receiving unit has received information indicating that the result of the internal lottery process is a win;
Second information outflow means for causing the second information to flow out to a wider area than the predetermined area;
Information collection means for collecting information from outside the aircraft,
When the first information is picked up by the information pickup means, the pickup information cause display control capable of displaying a special effect image that is not related to the result of the internal lottery process like the predetermined effect image. Means,
And a notice effect executing means for performing a notice effect that externally announces that the special effect image is displayed when the second information is picked up by the information collecting means. is there.

  In the above gaming machines, although a plurality of gaming machines are arranged in a state of being arranged with other gaming machines, gaming operations are individually executed independently of the other gaming machines. In executing this game operation, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) controls the main control means (main control board 710) for controlling the progress of the game operation and the control for the effect upon receiving an instruction from the main control means. And other control means (peripheral control board 810) to perform. The main control means and other control means are physically (electrically) connected by wiring, and various instructions are given from the main control means to the other control means via this wiring.

  The main control means includes receiving detection means (starting opening sensors 780, 784) for detecting the reception of game balls at the receiving openings (starting openings 600, 604), and lottery means (special symbol lottery means for performing internal lottery processing). 900), privilege game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player (big hit game execution means 715), and information transmission means (command transmission means 946) for transmitting various information to other control means. doing. In such a gaming machine, for example, when the launching means (launching device 57) launches a game ball toward the game area (game area 20) according to the player's operation, the acceptance detection means goes to the entrance. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the lottery means performs an internal lottery process, and when the lottery process is won, the bonus game executing means gives a bonus game advantageous to the player. Then, the information transmission means transmits the result of the lottery process and information related to the predetermined effect image to the other control means via the wiring. In this case, generally, information that can grasp both the result of the lottery process and the predetermined effect image displayed on the effect image display means is transmitted to the other control means. Information related to the result and information related to the predetermined effect image may be transmitted separately.

  “Information relating to a predetermined effect image” is information indicating the display mode of the effect image displayed on the effect image display means (effect display device 115). Command information indicating a variation pattern of reach production). Further, the “predetermined effect image” is an effect image that can suggest the result of an internal lottery process. Further, when the result of the internal lottery process is at least a win, a specific image that is an aspect of a predetermined effect image is displayed. This specific image is an image that can suggest that the result of the internal lottery process is a win, and is exemplified by “reach effect” and / or “zolo display”. In addition, the “privileged game” may be any game that gives a player an advantageous game value when the lottery result is won in each game machine. A big hit game that can be given is exemplified.

  The other control means includes an information receiving means (command receiving means 950) for receiving various information transmitted from the main control means, and an effect image display control means (effect for displaying a predetermined effect image on the effect image display means. Control means 962). Here, the information transmitted from the main control means and received by the information receiving means is information related to the result of the internal lottery process (winning information) and information related to the effect image (symbol variation pattern and symbol variation time). It is. When the information receiving means receives various types of information from the main control means, the effect image display control means displays a predetermined effect image in accordance with the received information, thereby deriving the result of the internal lottery process. Here, when the result of the lottery process is a win, a specific image (for example, an image of a decorative design stopped and displayed with a doublet or an image suggesting that a bonus game is executed) as a predetermined effect image By displaying, it is derived that the lottery result is a win.

  Further, the other control means includes a first information outflow means (waveform control board 425 and wave transmitting / receiving devices 188a and 188b) that causes the first information to flow out of the apparatus, and a second information that causes the second information to flow out of the apparatus. Information outflow means (waveform control board 425 and wave transmission / reception devices 188a and 188b) and information collection means (waveform control board 425 and wave transmission / reception devices 188a and 188b) for collecting information from outside the apparatus are included. Here, when the information indicating that the result of the internal lottery process is a win is received from the main control means, the first information outflow means causes the first information to flow out (release) to a predetermined area outside the machine, The second information outflow unit causes the second information to flow out (release). In this way, even if the announcement effect and the display of the special effect image are performed simultaneously on a plurality of gaming machines by causing the information to flow out twice when the notice effect is performed and when the special effect image is displayed, Deviation that may occur between gaming machines can be reduced. Further, the second information is leaked in a wider range than the predetermined area where the first information is leaked. As a specific example, the first information is leaked only to gaming machines arranged on the right side of the own machine, and the second information is leaked to gaming machines arranged on the left and right sides of the own machine. Embodiments are illustrated.

  The information collecting means can collect information from outside the apparatus. The information from outside the machine includes, for example, the first information and the second information leaked from other gaming machines constituting a plurality of gaming machine trains. Information and second information can be detected. Thus, unlike the relationship between the main control means and the other control means described above, between one gaming machine and another gaming machine, as in the case where the wiring is physically (electrically) connected. In addition, information can be exchanged without any complicated control. In addition, since there is no wired connection or network connection between multiple gaming machines, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player and prevent a decrease in the willingness of the game. Since there is no need for capital investment, it is possible to suppress the load on the hall.

  By the way, the first information flowing out from the first information outflow means and the second information outflowing from the second information outflow means are not transmitted to a specific gaming machine, and everyone collects them. (That is, the destinations of the first information and the second information are not determined as in the case of transmission / reception between wired-connected gaming machines). Further, even in the information collecting means, the information sent to itself is not received, but the information leaked from the first information outflow means or / and the second information outflow means is not specified. Will receive. As described above, since the first information and the second information are information that can be received by anyone, the first information or / and the second information outflow means implicitly receive the first information or / and The second information is leaked, and the information collecting means implicitly collects the information.

  Note that the first information and the second information are signals transmitted via a medium such as air, and the strength ( The one whose amplitude is attenuated is preferable. Such signals correspond to waves (waveform signals) exemplified by sound waves and light waves. In particular, in order for information from the outside of the machine to be silently collected by the information collection means so that the player does not notice it, such signals include audio, ultra-low A frequency, an ultrasonic wave, etc. are preferable. As described above, by using a predetermined waveform signal, not only can the trouble of electrical connection be eliminated, but there is no need to perform complicated control as in the case of physical wiring connection. Furthermore, there is no worry that the hanging board is connected as an illegal act. As the predetermined waveform signal, an electromagnetic wave may be adopted as long as it does not affect the human body.

  In addition, when the first information is collected by the information collecting means, the other control means displays the special information image as an effect different from the above-described effect image (effect control means 962). ,have. In other words, when the first information is leaked from the winning gaming machine to the outside when one of the gaming machines constituting the gaming machine row is won by an internal lottery process, the first information is A special effect image can be displayed on the collected gaming machines. The special effect image is displayed so as not to hinder the visual recognition of the display of the predetermined effect image displayed on the effect image display means. As a result, even if the information is collected and the special effect image is displayed when the display of the predetermined effect image is displayed (that is, when the effect with high expectation is performed), the predetermined effect image is displayed. The visual recognition of the display is not hindered, and a game with a single gaming machine can be enjoyed as before. Furthermore, the display of the predetermined effect image and the display of the special effect image, such as the interestingness of guessing whether or not the own device is a hit stand, from the mode of the predetermined effect image when the special effect image is displayed. A synergistic effect can be expected.

  Further, in the gaming machine, even if the first information and / or the second information is collected, the first information or / and the first information regarding whether to display the notice effect or / and the special effect image is displayed. It is left to the autonomy of gaming machines that have collected the information of 2. In other words, even if the first information or / and the second information is leaked from the winning gaming machine of the internal lottery process, it will be sent to the other gaming machines as a notice effect or / and a special effect image. It does not force display. By sharing the first information and / or the second information that has flowed out of the winning gaming machine of the internal lottery process with a plurality of gaming machines, only a shared effect such as display of a special effect image is performed. In other words, even if the other control means of each gaming machine collects the first information and / or the second information by the information collecting means, whether or not to display the notice effect or / and the special effect image is determined. You may have the means to determine. Thus, for example, when the first information or / and the second information are collected, if the effect image based on the result of the internal lottery process in the own machine is winning, Without displaying the special effect image, it is possible to continue displaying the effect image based on the winning.

  The “special effect image” is a series of effect images displayed by a plurality of gaming machines constituting the gaming machine train. In each gaming machine, not all of the series of effect images are displayed, but only a part of the effect images. Is displayed. For example, an effect image as a video in which a character or the like moves along a gaming machine row over a plurality of gaming machines can be given. In other words, this “special effect image” does not display the lottery result of each gaming machine only in the gaming machine as in the above-described predetermined effect image, but spans a plurality of gaming machines constituting the gaming machine row. Is displayed. On the other hand, since the above-mentioned predetermined effect image is an effect image that can suggest the result of the internal lottery process in the player's own machine, the series of effect images are not related to other game machines. It is only displayed on the effect image display means (that is, the result of the internal lottery process can only be suggested by the own device).

  In addition, according to the gaming machine, a special effect image is displayed across a plurality of gaming machines separately from the predetermined effect image performed on each gaming machine, so that an effect that can give a player a sense of expectation is provided. The number of times displayed is increased, and the player can be expected to win. In addition, since the special effect image is displayed when the first information is collected, the player is given a “measuring” like a predetermined effect mode performed in each gaming machine or a conventional group effect. It's different from a production that just gives a sense of expectation. More specifically, no matter how splendid production is made that gives the player a sense of expectation on the production image display means of each individual gaming machine, it is not a warning of the winner, it is simply the player's It is just a production that raises expectations. Moreover, if the frequency of flashy productions that give the player a sense of expectation is increased, the so-called gaze production will be increased in spite of the fact that it is not a hit, but on the contrary. Will fall.

  On the other hand, since the special effect image is performed when the first information is collected, when the special effect image is displayed, any one of the plurality of gaming machines constituting the gaming machine row is displayed. This is a notice that 100% of the game machines will always win. Thereby, a great expectation can be given to a plurality of players who are playing a game on the gaming machine island on which the special effect image is displayed. Moreover, even if the special effect image is displayed many times, all of them are performed by collecting the first information. Therefore, one of the plurality of gaming machines is always selected. Rather, the opportunity to give the player a sense of expectation will increase.

  Further, the other control means includes a notice effect execution means (effect control means 962) for performing a notice effect that externally announces that the special effect image is displayed when the second information is collected by the information collecting means. Have. Here, as described above, since the second information is leaked prior to the leak of the first information, the second information can be collected earlier than the first information in other gaming machines. It becomes. Thus, the notice effect is performed prior to the display of the special effect image without complicated control as in the case where each gaming machine is connected by wire.

  The first information and the second information may be information of different waveforms (for example, different frequencies) or may be information of the same waveform, but without complicated control. From the viewpoint of performing, it is preferable that the first information and the second information are information having the same waveform. However, if the first information and the second information have the same waveform, when the information collecting means collects the information, the special effect image should be displayed or the notice effect should be performed. I have to judge.

  The determination as to whether the special effect image should be displayed or the notice effect should be performed can be made based on whether the collected information is the first information or the second information. Hereinafter, a gaming machine (a hit stand) that leaks the first information and the second information causes the second information outflow means to leak out the second information prior to the outflow of the first information by the first information outflow means. The case is divided into the case where the first information is leaked by the first information outflow unit prior to the outflow of the second information by the second information outflow unit.

  In the case where the second information is leaked by the second information outflow means prior to the outflow of the first information by the first information outflow means, in the other gaming machine (losing stand) that collects these information, When the first information is collected, it is determined that the information is second information (handling), and a notice effect is performed. By performing this notice effect at the timing when the first information is collected, it becomes possible to perform the notice effect at almost the same timing with a plurality of gaming machines without performing complicated control. If the second information is collected within a certain time after the first information is collected, the second information is judged as the first information (handling), and the special effect image is displayed. . If the second information is not collected within a certain time after collecting the first information, it is determined that the stand does not display the special effect image.

  In the case where the first information is leaked by the first information outflow means prior to the outflow of the second information by the second information outflow means, in the other gaming machine (losing stand) that collects these information, If the second information is collected within a certain time after collecting the first information, the first information is judged as the first information (handling), and the second information is used as the second information. Judge (handle). At this time, even if the first information is collected, the special effect image is not displayed immediately, and the notice effect is performed when the second information is collected. Then, after performing the notice effect, the special effect image is displayed. If the second information is not collected within a certain time after the first information is collected, the first information is determined (handled) as the second information. That is, it is determined that the own stand does not display the special effect image, and only the notice effect is performed. However, if the winning platform causes the first information to flow out prior to the second information being leaked, the special effect image will not be displayed immediately even if the first information is collected. When displaying an image, the timing at which the special effect image is displayed may shift between gaming machines. In addition, the notice effect is performed when the second information is collected, and the special effect image is displayed after that, so the time during which the special effect image can be displayed is shortened. This is because, if the display of the special effect image is not completed before the display of the predetermined effect image for winning is completed, the significance of displaying the special effect image is lost. On the other hand, when the hit stand causes the second information to flow out prior to the outflow of the first information, the notice effect can be performed at the timing when the first information is collected, so the time for displaying the special effect image Will not be squeezed. From this point of view, the gaming machine that has won the internal lottery process allows the second information outflow means to flow out the second information prior to the outflow of the first information through the first information outflow means. Is preferred.

  It should be noted that, even if any of the first information and the second information is leaked first, the second information is collected after a certain time has elapsed since the first information was collected. If the information is not collected, the first information is reset when the predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, when the second information is collected after the first information is collected until a certain time elapses, when the second information is collected, the first information and 2 The second information is reset. When new information is collected after the reset, the new information is determined as the first information. Further, the method for determining whether to display a special effect image or to perform a notice effect is not limited to this.

  By the way, the “notice effect” means an effect aspect that expresses to the outside that a special effect image may be displayed. For example, a decoration lamp generally provided in a gaming machine, a game A mode in which a conspicuous light emitter such as a top lamp provided in the vicinity of the machine is turned on or blinked is preferable. As a result, the special effect image will be displayed not only to the player who is playing the game on the gaming machine island, but also to the person who is just passing by or who is playing the game on another gaming machine island. And the effect of attracting customers of the gaming machines arranged on the gaming machine island can be enhanced. Also, according to the gaming machine, since both the predetermined effect image and the special effect image are displayed on the same effect image display device, even if the special effect image is displayed, it is a special effect image. There is a possibility that it cannot be recognized. Therefore, prior notice display is performed prior to display of the special effect image, so that the special effect image can be displayed in advance.

  Furthermore, by configuring the notice effect to be executed prior to the special effect image, it is determined which of the plurality of gaming machines constituting the gaming machine island the special effect image is displayed on. It is possible to make the player grasp in advance. And if a player gives a notice effect on the gaming machine where he / she is playing, he / she can have a sense of expectation that the result of the internal lottery process will be a win, which suppresses a decrease in interest it can.

[Technology 2]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2 is
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1,
The notice effect is
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is performed in a manner capable of appealing to a third party including at least players of other gaming machines constituting the gaming machine train that the specific effect image can be displayed. .

  In the above gaming machine, an aspect capable of appealing that a specific effect image can be displayed to a third party including at least players of other game machines constituting the gaming machine train, that is, the specific effect image is displayed. The notice effect is performed in such a manner that what can be done is appealing. As an aspect that can be appealed, for example, when the notice effect is performed by the light emitting means, an aspect in which light having directivity toward a third party is emitted. Further, in the case where the notice effect is performed by the sound generation means, a mode in which directional sound effects (musical sound, voice, etc.) directed to a third party are output is exemplified. However, such light emitting means and sounding means do not necessarily have directivity, and it is only necessary to be able to appeal that light or sound is emitted to a third party by diffusion.

  Further, the notice effect is performed so as to appeal to a third party by changing to a specific mode such as lighting or blinking by the light emitting means. Thereby, it becomes possible to let a third party know that the special effect image is displayed on a plurality of gaming machines constituting the gaming machine row. Moreover, since the notice effect is performed by a plurality of gaming machines, the effect is great.

[Technology 3]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3 is
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1,
It further includes an effect means for performing at least the notice effect.
In the production means,
In accordance with the result of the internal lottery process, a predetermined effect is performed, and when a specific condition is satisfied, a player's action is performed on the predetermined effect image related to the result of the internal lottery process. Productions that could interest you were performed,
If the first information is collected by the information collecting means, the result of the internal lottery process in any one of the plurality of gaming machines constituting the gaming machine row is a hit. In the gaming machine, the notice effect that can appeal to a third party including at least players of other gaming machines constituting the gaming machine row can be performed.

  The above gaming machine includes at least an effect means (frame decoration lamp 842) for performing a notice effect. In this effect means, not only the notice effect that is performed when any one of a plurality of gaming machines is a win, but the result of an internal lottery process in the gaming machine when a specific condition is satisfied An effect that can make the player interested in a predetermined effect image related to the game is also performed. The effect that can attract the player's interest is an effect that excites the expectation that the specific image is displayed on the effect image display means (that is, the expectation that it is a win). For example, in the effect image display means, a so-called step-up effect is generally performed in which the sense of expectation for winning improves step by step. At this time, the effect image display is also performed by stepping up the effect in the effect means. Combined with the effect image at the means, the player of the gaming machine can be given an expectation that the result of the internal lottery process will be a hit. The specific condition is satisfied, for example, when the internal lottery process is won, or when the reach effect is displayed as a predetermined effect image although the internal lottery process is not won. Further, when the first information is collected by the information collecting means, a notice effect is performed. This notice effect indicates that the result of the internal lottery processing in any one of the plurality of gaming machines constituting the gaming machine row is a win, and the game of the other gaming machine constituting the gaming machine row It is an effect that can appeal to a third party including at least a person.

  In this way, in the gaming machine, even if an effect that can give the player a sense of expectation is performed by the effect image display means, the result of the internal lottery process is not necessarily a win (that is, In other words, it does not give a notice that it is 100%, but includes a so-called gasse that may win.) On the other hand, as described above, the notice effect is always the result of the internal lottery process in any one of the plurality of gaming machines constituting the gaming machine train.

  Here, it is preferable that the notice effect is performed in a mode clearly different from the predetermined effect performed according to the result of the internal lottery process so that a third party can be appealed that the notice effect is performed. . For example, when the effect means is a light emitting means having a plurality of light emitting elements capable of emitting full color, for example, an effect that a part of the light emitting elements emits red light (corresponding to a predetermined effect) is always performed, and a specific condition is satisfied. In such a case, an effect in which all of the light emitting elements emit light in red (corresponding to an effect that can attract the player's interest) is performed, and when the first information is collected, Or it is a case where an effect (corresponding to a notice effect) in which part of the light is emitted in full color is performed.

[Technology 4]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4 is
In the gaming machine described in technical idea 3,
An outer frame attached to a gaming machine island where a plurality of gaming machines constituting the gaming machine row are installed;
A body frame attached to the outer frame;
A game board attached to the main body frame and formed with the game area;
A door frame that is disposed on the front side of the game board and has a game window that allows the game area to be visually recognized;
The effect means is a light emitting means capable of emitting light in a specific manner, and is provided on the door frame.

  The gaming machine includes an outer frame (outer frame 2) attached to the gaming machine island, a main body frame (main body frame 3) attached to the outer frame, and a game board (game area board 81) attached to the main body frame. And a door frame (door frame 5) disposed on the front side of the game board. A game area is formed on the game board, and a game window is formed on the door frame. A transparent member such as a glass plate is fitted into the game window (game window 101) so that the game area can be visually recognized. In general, the door frame can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame and the game board by rotating around either the left or right end. In such a gaming machine, the light emitting means (frame decoration lamp 842) as the effect means is provided on the door frame (more specifically, the front surface of the door frame). More specifically, it is sufficient that the predetermined effect image displayed on the effect image display means is visible to the player, and does not need to be visible to a third party. On the other hand, the notice effect performed by the effect means needs to be appealed to a third party, so that the fact that the light is emitted in a specific manner is provided on the front surface of the door frame that is easy to appeal to the third party. By doing so, the light emitting means is not obstructed by various parts provided in the outer frame, the main body frame, and the game area, and can appeal to a third party when performing the notice effect.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which obstruct | occluded the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a perspective view which shows a pachinko machine from the upper right front. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view which shows the whole rear side of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a side view of the main body frame before attaching components. It is a perspective view which shows the main body frame which attached components from upper right back. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a door frame from the upper left front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a door frame from upper right back. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the door lens unit attached to the front side of a door frame from the upper left front. It is a disassembled perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the relationship between the lens cover of a door lens unit, and the lens cover provided in a plate unit. It is a front view of a door frame at the time of removing the member irradiated to LED among the members which constitute a speaker cover and a decoration member. It is a front view of the dish unit provided in the front of a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a dish unit from the upper left front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a dish unit from upper right back. It is a front view which shows the structure of the pachinko main part which assembled | attached the game board which has a game area | region, and the several unit with which the game board is mounted | worn. It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko principal part from the upper left front. It is a perspective view which shows arrangement | positioning of the opaque member of a pachinko main part from the upper right front. It is a perspective view which shows the game board which has a game area | region from the upper right front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of the pachinko main part from the upper right front. It is a front view of a center character. It is a perspective view which shows a center accessory from the upper right front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a center accessory from the upper right front. It is a perspective view which shows a main winning opening unit from the upper right front. It is a front view of a decoration body unit. It is a perspective view which shows a decoration body unit from the upper right front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a decoration body unit from the upper right front. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the light emission board | substrate unit from the upper right front. It is sectional drawing which shows the cross section between AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing which shows the cross section between BB in FIG. It is a front view of a translucent decoration body panel. It is a perspective view which shows a translucent decoration body panel from the upper right front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a translucent decorative body panel from the upper right front. It is a perspective view which shows a backlight unit from the upper right front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a backlight unit from the upper right front. It is explanatory drawing which shows a structure in the longitudinal cross-section of a backlight unit. It is a fragmentary sectional view which shows the cross section between CC in FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view which shows the cross section between DD in FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a main substrate. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a peripheral substrate. It is a functional block diagram which shows roughly the functional structure of a main control board and a periphery control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the fluctuation | variation pattern table. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the production | presentation progress direction selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the output direction distribution table. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of a fish school production start point table and a fish school production start time table. It is a figure which shows an example of an attenuation determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the waveform of a winning wave, and the waveform of the detected winning wave. It is a figure which shows an example of the waveform of a winning wave, and the waveform of the detected winning wave. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main system process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory big hit control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a winning wave output reservation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a winning wave output execution process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a winning wave detection process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of an effect timing determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of effect image display processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the 1st effect image | video in an effect display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the 1st effect image | video in an effect display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the 1st effect image | video in an effect display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the 1st effect image | video in an effect display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the 2nd effect image | video in an effect display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the 2nd effect image | video in an effect display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the 2nd effect image | video in an effect display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the 2nd effect image | video in an effect display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the front of each pachinko machine which comprises the game machine row | line | column by plural, and an effect mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the front of each pachinko machine which comprises the game machine row | line | column by plural, and an effect mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the front of each pachinko machine which comprises the game machine row | line | column by plural, and an effect mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the front of each pachinko machine which comprises the game machine row | line | column by plural, and an effect mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the front of each pachinko machine which comprises the game machine row | line | column by plural, and an effect mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the front of each pachinko machine which comprises the game machine row | line | column by plural, and an effect mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the front of each pachinko machine which comprises the game machine row | line | column by plural, and an effect mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the front of each pachinko machine which comprises the game machine row | line | column by plural, and an effect mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the front of each pachinko machine which comprises the game machine row | line | column by plural, and an effect mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the front of each pachinko machine which comprises the game machine row | line | column by plural, and an effect mode. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of other forms. It is a figure which shows an example of the front of each game machine in the case where the pachinko machine of other forms comprises the game machine row | line | column, and an effect aspect.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 20 Game area 53 Ball dispenser 57 Launcher 81 Game area board 82 Normal symbol display 84 Special symbol display 88 Special symbol hold display 92 Normal symbol hold display Device 101 Game window 115 Production display device 144a, 144b Speaker 188a, 188b Wave receiver / receiver 240 Frame decoration relay terminal board 247 Center accessory 249 Decoration body opening 300 Dish unit 318 Handle unit 326 Operation button unit 327 Operation button 341a, 341b Speaker 395 Power supply board 423 First dimming board 424 Second dimming board 425 Waveform control board 471 Out port 500 Open / close device for big hit game 564 Upper cold cathode tube set 565 Lower cold cathode tube set 600 Upper start port 602 General winning port 604 Lower start port 606 movable piece 612 Gate 614 regular winning opening 700 main board 710 main control board 711 CPU
712 ROM
713 RAM
720 Dispensing control board 750 Panel relay terminal board 754 Opening / closing device relay terminal board 760 Gate sensor 762 General winning opening sensor 766 Symbol limiting resistance substrate 768 Normal symbol / special symbol display substrate 774 Normal electric accessory solenoid 776 Switching device count sensor 778 Opening / closing device Opening / closing solenoid 780 Upper start port sensor 784 Lower start port sensor 800 Peripheral board 810 Peripheral control board 811 CPU
812 ROM
813 RAM
818 sound source IC
816 Display device control board 832 CPU
834 RAM
836 ROM
838 VDP
839 Image ROM
842 Frame decoration lamp 850 Lamp drive board 852 Panel decoration lamp 853 Center decoration lamp 854 Discharge port detection sensor

Claims (3)

A gaming machine that configures a gaming machine train in a state of being arranged in plural, and that performs individual independent gaming operations in the gaming machine train,
A launching means capable of launching a game ball toward the game area;
A receiving port capable of receiving a game ball launched toward the game area by the launching means;
Effect image display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image;
Main control means for controlling the progress of the gaming operation;
Other control means connected to the main control means and controlling the effect image displayed on the effect image display means ;
With
The main control means includes
An acceptance detection means for detecting acceptance of a game ball at the acceptance port;
Lottery means for performing an internal lottery process based on detection of acceptance of a game ball by the acceptance detection means;
When the result of the internal lottery process is a win, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player;
Information transmission means for transmitting the result of the internal lottery process and the information related to the predetermined effect image displayed on the effect image display means to the other control means connected by wire to the other control means via the wire and,
Have
The other control means includes
Information receiving means for receiving the information transmitted from the main control means via the wiring;
Based on the information received by the information receiving means, a predetermined effect image as a result of the internal lottery process is displayed on the effect image display means, and when the result of the lottery process is successful, Effect image display control means for displaying a special image as the predetermined effect image ;
Have
The other control means further includes:
A first information outflow unit that causes the first information to flow out to a predetermined area outside the machine, on condition that the information receiving unit has received information indicating that the result of the internal lottery process is a win;
Second information outflow means for causing the second information to flow out to a wider area than the predetermined area;
Information collection means for collecting information from outside the aircraft,
When the first information is picked up by the information pickup means, the pickup information cause display control capable of displaying a special effect image that is not related to the result of the internal lottery process like the predetermined effect image. Means,
When the second information is collected by the information collecting means, a notice effect executing means for performing a notice effect indicating to the outside that the special effect image is displayed ;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:   The notice effect is
  This is performed in a manner that can appeal to a third party including at least players of other gaming machines constituting the gaming machine train that the specific effect image can be displayed.
  The gaming machine according to claim 1.   It further includes an effect means for performing at least the notice effect.
  In the production means,
  In accordance with the result of the internal lottery process, a predetermined effect is performed, and when a specific condition is satisfied, a player's action is performed on the predetermined effect image related to the result of the internal lottery process. Productions that could interest you were performed,
  If the first information is collected by the information collecting means, the result of the internal lottery process in any one of the plurality of gaming machines constituting the gaming machine row is a hit. The notice effect that can appeal to a third party including at least players of other gaming machines constituting the gaming machine row can be performed.
  The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.